You are on page 1of 326

AN ISO 9001 & 14001 COMPANY

TENDER DOCUMENT

e-TENDER No: SRO/CON/ETS/094

Tender for “Piling work for Construction of New Technology Centre at


Sriperumbudur, Tamil Nadu under Package – I”

VOLUME – II

Civil approved methodology, QAP plan, EHS Documents and COVID-19 Manual

ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED


(A GOVT. OF INDIA ENTERPRISE)
Southern Regional Office, Chennai

Signature of the Bidder with seal Page 1 of 2 EPI


Index

Sl. No. of
Description Page No.
No. Pages

Methodology for Civil works, QAP, EHS Documents ,


03-345 343
1. COVID-19 Manual Soil Investigation report and Tender
Drawings

Signature of the Bidder with seal Page 2 of 2 EPI


ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Project New Technology Centre, Sriperumbudur

Client Office of Development Commissioner Ministry of Micro,


Small and Medium Enterprises

Document Construction Methodology

First Submission Tender Purpose Only Rev -0

Issue Status
Signat
Description Name Designation
ure
Prepared by Sr. Manager

Reviewed by DGM

Safety Reviewed by Safety Manager

Approved By GM

Page. 1 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

PURPOSE

The purpose of this methodology is to provide construction sequence, quality assurance and
quality control, safety measures adopted in all construction works.

REFERENCES:

 Approved Construction Drawing


 Contract technical specification
 IS Codes
 Quality Plan
 Safety Plan

RESPONSIBILITIES:

 Project Manager- Responsible for monitoring of project and coordination with


cons1.11ta.nt.
 Site in Charge - Responsible for the correct and safe execution of the works falls
within the execution department and shall report to project manager.
 Chief HSE Manager- Responsible towards HSE requirements at site and shall report
Project Manager.
 QA/QC Manager: Responsible for maintaining and fulfilling all related documentation
and responsible for quality control and shall report to project manager.
 QA/QC Engineer: Responsible for verification / inspection of all the activities in
accordance with Specification / Checklists.
 Site Engineer: Ensures the construction activity as per approved work procedure,
correct quality & safety and monitoring all records and shall report to Project Manager.

CONTENTS

Page. 2 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
SL NO. ITEMS PG.NO

Page. 3 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR SETTING OUT

SETTING OUT:

 Prior to use, ensure that all survey equipment have valid calibration certificates.

Page. 4 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Establish TBM at site, either from a PBM taken by the land survey team with respect to
road or any permanent structure using auto level and staff.

 Establish H 2 station points/TBM (having specific Northing and Easting) at accessible


locations away from periphery of the building to be constructed.

 Ensure that benchmark shall remain undisturbed till the completion of project.

 Construct masonry pillars for the established benchmarks with embedded steel plates at
top. Plaster and finish the top surface neatly.

 Drive 20 mm dia. rebar's to at least 1.50 m depth all around the pillars and barricade the
pillars to protect the pillars from displacement.

 Centering and leveling and leveling of instrument shall be done at TBM.

 Measure existing site boundary and send it for preparation of setting out plan.

 Plot detail survey plan showing site boundary, all reference points / pillar locations in
Auto-cad.

 then give a setting out plan by incorporating the above with a baseline and diagonal
measurements for the fixing two corners of the structure.

 Establish baseline by fixing two corner and closed traverses as per setting out plan with
the help of theodolite.

Page. 5 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR PILING

1. WORK PROCEDURE

1.1 Initial Survey


The GPS value and centre line of the proposed alignment shall be transferred at
structure location on reference points. The location/ Co Ordination of the each

Page. 6 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
pile will be worked out, tabulated, and submitted to the Engineer for review and
approval before commencement of piling. Pile point locations and elevations
shall be checked & record jointly. Two offsets will be positioned at suitable.
distances say at 2 to 3 m. points. R, L 's shall be marked near pile location on
rigid structure.

1.2 Barricading
The working area shall be properly barricaded as per the traffic diversion plan.
The barricading boards shall be properly anchored into the ground as per
approved drawing and solar reflectors shall be provided on barricaded boards.
Proper lighting arrangements shall be providing the inside the working area to
work in the night shift. Security arrangements shall be made to prevent.
unauthorized entry of men and machineries inside the working premise.

1.3 Utility Identification & Diversion


Underground utilities at pile location shall be identified by excavating trail trenches and
recorded. These utilities shall be diverted / disconnected with
prior approval from the concerned authorities.

1.4 Field Procedure for DMC Piling


DMC piling method shall be as per IS2911 under specification of bored cast in situ piles. The
positioning of centre points of the piles
are checked by the surveyor. After the point for boring operation is set out by the surveyor the
tripod is paced such that each side legs are at least 1.5 m away from the point, keeping the centre
of borehole exactly in the centre. The bailer is then attached with the rope and the boring
operation is initiated.
After bailer reaches its full length into the soil, the guide casing is inserted into the hole for
farther operations. Insertion of the guide casing to prevent the side collapse and caving in, a
guide casing of 2750 mm length is placed on the top of the bore hole and hammered by the bailer
to insert it into the soil. This will be
withdrawn after concreting is over.

1.5 Boring with Chisel


Once the guide casing is placed, the boring is started with chisel. The chisel has 4 nozzles from
where water jet is forced on the hard soil layer as the boring progresses.

1.6 Progression of boring and addition of DMC rods


DMC rods are added one after another as the depth increases. The DMC head are attached on top
of the DMC rods which has the plunge which receives the water from delivery hose. The whole
system is pulled up by the rope and the D-Shackle with the help of the winch system and then
left to fall free, so that the chisel at the bottom cuts the soil and the boring progresses.

Page. 7 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
The loose soil produced by boring, mixes with water and comes up and is stored in the wash vat,
where the soil gets precipitated and the water is again usable. Taking out the DMC rods and
Chisel and Insertion of the reinforcement cage
After the boring is complete up to the desired depth, the DMC rods are removed one by one
using the DMC fork and the chisel is also removed. Then the steel reinforcement cage is inserted
and welded wherever there are joints.

1.7 Bentonite Slurry as Drilling Fluid


 The Steel containers of required capacity shall be placed at site as per bore depth.
 The Bentonite powder shall be procured and tested as per the requirements as specified.
 Enough Bentonite required for a pile shall be saturated in water for minimum 8hrs.
 The properly mixed fresh Bentonite slurry, re-use bentonite slurry and before concreting
slurry shall always satisfy the properties.
 Liquid Limit of Bentonite shall not be less than 400% percent.
 Bentonite slurry will be checked for the required density before pumping to the bore hole.
 While boring of pile, a bund shall be made using sandbags all around the pile to avoid the
spilling of Bentonite mud onto the road. The rate of Bentonite circulation shall be
maintained such that in no case the Bentonite can overflow over the bund made.
 Waste bentonite slurry will be removed & disposed at identified dumping yards which
will be brought under the Pollution Control Board certification. Trip sheets will be
maintained separately for Bentonite disposal.
 The contaminated bentonite slurry from the settling tanks and the bentonite slurry
contaminated by concrete in the pile bore during the final stages of concreting will be
disposed safely.
 The sediments are dried up and they are disposed by dumpers. The muck in fluid stage
shall be disposed at designated places by tankers. The semi solid muck out of borehole
shall be mixed with dry soil and disposed at designated dump yard. If Bentonite is used
as drilling mud in exceptional cases where we face any localized problems, then we shall
submit the details and location of Muck disposal as an amendment to this method
statement.

1.8 Tremie Pipe Fixing


 Tremie pipes of 250 mm dia shall be provided up to the bottom level of the pile. Various
lengths of tremie pipes are available. The tremie pipes shall be lowered one after another
by Quick coupling system. All the joints shall be air/ watertight.
 The vacuum length between tremie pipe end 311d borehole end shall not be more than
0.3m. Proper record shall be maintained to monitor the Tremie fixing & removing
procedures.
 Finally, the M.S hopper of 0.5 to 0.75cum capacity shall be fixed at top.

2. LOWERING OF CAGE

Page. 8 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
The reinforcement shall be made into cages sufficiently rigid to withstand handling without
damage. In case the reinforcement case is made up of more than one segment, the same shall be
assembled by providing necessary laps or, preferably, by welding.
Stirrups to the main bars shall be tack welded.

Care shall be taken to ensure that the reinforcement bars do not move together before the cage is
lowered down the hole.

Proper cover and central placement of the reinforcement shall be ensuring by use of suitable
concrete spacers or rollers, case specifically for the purpose.

 The reinforcement cage shall be shifted near to the pile bore, lifted using the piling rig
with a set of double sling ropes and lowered into the pile shaft casing till the required
depth of bore hole.
 Cranes shall also be used to lifting the reinforcement cage. The details of the crane will
be submitted after 3rd party inspection and while submission of Safety methodology. The
approximate weight of the reinforcement cage to be lifted shall be 1.75MT and that of
caging is 0.05MT.
 D- Shackles and slings of 25MT, l0MT, 5MT and 2MT capacity shall be used for lifting
the rebar cages and other equipment’s. The selection of D shackles and slings shall be as
per load lifted.
 Only circular concrete cover blocks of 150mm diameter (having the same strength of pile
concrete) threaded onto the helix shall be used for encoring the cover.
 All main longitudinal bars shall be welded at lapping zones using electrodes as specified.
The last circle of helical burs shall be welded to main longitudinal bars.
 The projected length of the longitudinal bar beyond the cut off level of pile shall be 60
times bar diameter, or as specified in the GFC drawings /approved BBS.

3. CONCRETING:

 The approved concrete mix having minimum cement content of 400kg/ cum & max. size
aggregate of 20mm shall be used for pile concreting.
 The concrete shall be checked for consistency (slump 150-175mm) & cubes casted as per
the requirement.
 The specific gravity of drilling mud at the base of bore shall be maintained as specified in
the corresponding tables given above before placing of concrete.
 The hopper and attached tremie pipes shall be wetted with water before commencing the
concrete works.
 The first charge of concrete shall be placed in the hopper over a stopper plate kept at the
neck of hopper.
 By releasing the stopper plate, concrete will be discharged suddenly from the hopper into
the pipes in one continuous operation to ensure the flushing action to minimize mixing of
water or drilling mud and concrete.

Page. 9 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Tremie pipe shall be removed during pouring of concrete ensuring that tremie bottom is
embedded into the previously placed concrete for minimum depth of 2 meter below the
free rising surface of the concrete as a precaution against accidental withdrawal.
 The rate of concrete pouring shall not be less than 6m (length of pile)/hour to ensure
compaction by hydraulic static head.
 A record as enclosed in Annexure 4 shall be maintained for tremie pipes which comprises
of tremie length during lowering tremie pipe removed at stages and sounding of concrete.
 The top of concrete in a pile shall be brought to 1.0 meter above the cut-off level to
remove all balance and week concrete to ensure good concrete at cut off level.
 The casting height of concrete above cutoff level shall be agreed with GC before
commencing the concrete work and after some piles installation the concrete above cut
off level shall be jointly inspected and the depth of concrete above cutoff level shall be
mutually agreed.
 The placing of concrete shall be done within 6 hours after completion of pile boring. If it
is delayed due to some unforeseen circumstances, the already laid concrete shall be
removed from the pile bore using cleaning bucket.
 Tremie pipes and reinforcement cage shall be lifted from the pile bore and cleaned. Then
the cleaning bucket shall be used for removing the old concrete. After thorough cleaning
again the cage shall be lowered followed by the casing pipe and the concreting shall be
laid.
 While concreting the pile, the overflowing drilling mud from pile shall be pumped out to
a watertight container / tank.
 After completing the pile concrete, the hopper & the tremie pipes shall be removed and
cleaned properly.
 After completion of pile concrete, casing shall be removed immediately or before initial
setting time by using a crane /piling rig.
 When a casing is being extracted enough concrete shall be maintained within the bore to
avoid necking of the pile.
 Bored muck shall be placed temporarily adjacent to the pile under construction &
subsequently disposed of in an environment friendly manner and as approved by the local
authorities (Pollution control board).
 After each pile has been cast any empty bore shall be protected and carefully backfilled
as soon as possible with approved materials.

4. QUALITY ASSURANCE:

 Piles shall be installed as accurately as possible according to drawings.


 Greater care shall be executed in respect of installation of piles. A deviation of 1.5%, of
plumb shall not be exceeded.
 Piles shall not deviate more than 75mm (when used in groups) from their designed
positions at the working level of piling rig.
 If any deviation is observed the same shall be recorded and shall raise a nonconformance
report for the same.

Page. 10 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Proper care shall be taken to ensure the correct implementation of the working
procedures described in this method statement.

5. TESTING:

Test cubes shall be made in accordance with IS 516 and all sampling and testing in
accordance with IS 1199 unless specified or instructed otherwise. At least one test shall
be Made for every 10 cum of concrete and not less than one test shall be made for any
one day's Concreting operation. Each test shall consist of 6 no. works test cubes cured
three cubes shall be tested at 7 days and other three at 28 days.

6. RECORDING OF DATA:

A competent supervisor shall be present to record the necessary information during the
installation of piles. The data to be recorded shall include:
 The dimensions of the piles, including the reinforcement detail and the mark of the pile.
 The type of boring employed.
 The type of soil in which pile is constructed.
 The depth bored.
 The depth of water table.
 When drilling mud is used, the specific gravity of the fresh supply and contaminated mud
in the borehole before concreting is taken up, in case of first few pi1es and subsequently
at suitable interval of piles.
 The time taken for concreting.
 The cut off level /working level and
 The consumption of cement
 Any other important observations.
Any deviation from the designed location, alignment of load carrying capacity of any pile shall
be noted and promptly reported to the Engineer-in- charge.

Page. 11 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR EXCAVATION

EQUIPMENT:

Earth moving machines and equipment, Survey instruments, Measuring tape, spade, crowbar,
thread, lime powder etc.,

CLEARING OF SITE:

The area to be Excavated / filled shall be cleared of fences, plants, logs, stumps, bush,
vegetation, rubbish, etc. If any roots or stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall also

Page. 12 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
be removed. The material so removed shall be disposed of as directed by the
Architect/Construction Manager.

SURFACE PREPARATION:

All excavations shall be carried out to its minimum dimensions as required for safety and
working facility. Before starting the excavation, it shall be ensured no underground live cables /
pipes / drains are crossing the excavation area. Ensure safe access path to the excavation area
with the help of walkways / ladders etc. Vehicle positioning and stability shall be ensured.

EXCAVATION PROCEDURE:

The Contractor shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set properly all lines
with the Total Station Survey and establish proper bench marks, center lines of grids, center
lines of roads, etc.; as indicated in the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. All grid pillars
or control points shall be guarded and checked for any disturbances. Excavation plan with
necessary working space shall be prepared and the same shall be marked with line powder on the
ground. Block level shall be taken at 5m intervals maximum and recorded jointly before taking
up the excavation. Shoring and Strutting shall be provided wherever necessary for protecting the
sides of excavation and also barricades shall be provided around the excavated area for safety.
The face of the excavated earth shall be cut to slope or shored in order to hold the earth. Proper
barricades shall be provided around the excavated area. Rough excavation shall be carried out to
a depth of 150mm above final excavation level. The balance shall be removed with care. Soft
pockets if any found shall be removed even below the final level of excavation and the same
shall be filled as directed by the engineer in-charge.

DEWATERING:

All excavated pits shall be provided with proper dewatering arrangement. Arrangements to be
done so that surface water does not enter the foundation pit and the pit remains dry for
subsequent activities.

CARTING & STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS:

Excavated earth to be kept away from the edges of the foundation pits (Approx. 2.00m away
from the top edge) or to be properly stacked at the dump yard. Ensure availability of NOC for the
landowner if the dump yard / land is outside the site premise for unwanted earth/unusable earth.

Page. 13 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Page. 14 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR PILE CAP


FOUNDATIONS

1. SCOPE:

This document enumerates the plan activities and execution activities for the
construction of Pile cap foundations for Anode Storage building within the EMAL
Projects.

2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS:

 EMAL Project – Specifications.


 All relevant applicable BS codes of Practice for various civil works.
 Applicable Drawings

Page. 15 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
3. CONTROL MEASURES:

 Ensure all permissions and consents have been obtained.


 Ensure Approval Status of QAP.
 Ensure approval status of this Method Statement has been received.
 Ensure approval status of ITP.
 Ensure maintain a system of records that permit verification of any issued report
before and after work.
 Prepare any necessary toolbox talks records by conducting toolbox training.
 Ensure all plants are escorted to work site by qualified Banks man.
 Ensure work area is cordoned off.
Site briefings will be undertaken to induct all operatives in the detail of this method
statement. All personnel attending will sign the briefing sheet acknowledging they
understand the briefing given.

WORK SEQUENCE FOR EXCAVATION:

4.1 Preliminary Site Investigation


 A preliminary site investigation report shall be maintained for the existing ground
Levels and the proposed excavation levels exactly in accordance with the lines,
levels, grades and curves shown on the plans or as directed as per approved Project
drawings for excavation levels Layouts.
 As per site conditions the entire earthwork activities shall be limited to the area
inside the plot boundary.
 The entire area required for construction of Anode Storage building area will be
identified and marked with chalk powder (white) and will be barricaded with
suitable hard barricading material with access.
 Underground utilities shall be identified prior to start the works.

4.2 Setting Out.


The surveyor shall establish all control points (through primary datum levels) in
respect to the center lines/grid lines/cutting lines, install and maintain the reference
marks, benchmarks etc. and maintain them as long as required for setting out,
establishing Bench Marks and other reference marks
.
3.3 Site Clearance
Rock projections boulders or other hard spots, if any, in excavation shall be
removed to a depth not less than 100mm below the formation level.

3.4 Sequence of works


 Dismantling of existing bituminous pavement for the entire area of construction will
be done.

Page. 16 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 The surveyor will mark the foundation corners with coordinates and Underground
utilities shall be marked by total station equipment and the same will be subjected
to approval by Client / Consultant.
 After approval for the location of foundations and underground utilities marking,
excavation will be commenced with the excavator within the outer limits of
marking for all the foundations. Care will be taken for the pile’s protection against
any damage and existing utilities.
 Excavation within 5m radius of underground utilities by mechanical methods shall
be avoided, if not possible excavation shall be carried after approval from
concerned department. Exploration holes shall be done for locating the underground
utilities before mechanical excavation starts.
 The excavation works will be carried out as per markings which were duly
approved by Client /Consultant for all the foundations. The exaction depth is
approximately 2.0 mt, so the excavation will be done by step cutting of 1.0 mt
vertical height with 1.0 mt horizontal set back and again 1.0 mt vertical height to
reach ground level for three sides only. 4th side due to space constraint on existing
conveyor side, excavation will be done by slope for available width only. Shoring
will be done, where space is constrained for slopping and stepping.
 Once the excavation is completed up to the foundation level, pile head breaking
works will commence.
 Marking will be made on each pile periphery at pile cut off level and a cut with
grinder will be made on the marking to prevent excess breaking of concrete below
cut off level. Pile chipping / breaking will be done with air compressor and
pneumatic concrete breaker from top of existing pile until cut off level. Suitable
scaffolding platforms shall be provided for breaking above 1m height.
 All the loose concrete debris will be removed with the use of Excavator. Excavator
bucket will be kept at safe location and debris will be loaded into the bucket
manually where the work area is small and critical by means of adjacent services.
Special protection like hard covering for nearby services shall be provided.
 The area will be fine leveled manually, and subbase will be compacted with plate
compactor / mini roller to the required degree of compaction. Will ensure 95% field
density.
 Required formation levels and Compaction test will be subjected to Client /
Consultant inspection and upon approval will proceed to subsequent activity.
 1000-gauge polythene sheet is laid in the foundation area. Blinding concrete will be
laid to a thickness as specified in approved drawing by pump or by suitable
methods.
 Inspection will be raised for Blinding concrete for approval.
 Concrete protection with bituminous paint shall be applied uniformly as per
Manufacturers recommendation over the blinding surface and will be subjected to
inspection and approval.

Page. 17 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Reinforcement steel will be transported and lowered in position. Fixing of
foundation reinforcement will be carried out as per the approved drawings.
Thereafter, Pedestal vertical reinforcement will be fixed as per the approved
drawings.
 Prefabricated Doka shuttering sheets will be shifted and lowered by crane/boom
truck at locations wherever access is possible otherwise conventional shuttering will
be placed with adequate supports. The side shutters will be provided with adequate
supports in order to achieve the required shape and sizes of the foundations after the
concrete pour and shall be as per approved drawings.
 Reinforcement and shuttering works are subjected to inspection before proceeding
to concrete works.
 Upon approval of reinforcement & shuttering, concrete of required grade will be
transported to site from approved supplier and placed into form work. The concrete
compaction will be ensured with concrete vibrators and needles which will be made
available at site during the concrete pour.
 The concrete will be laid up to the required levels and concrete surface will be
finished smooth as required. Concrete pump shall be used for pouring concrete
wherever applicable.
 Curing will be commenced immediately after concrete is set and shall be
maintained for 4 days.
 After the concrete is completely set, deshuttering will be carried out after a period
as specified in project specifications.
 Immediately after deshuttering, if any finishing is required to be done on sides of
foundation, the same will be carried out with information to Client / Consultant. If
required, structural repair material shall be used wherever applicable.
 The next day after completion of pile cap concrete, reinforcement steel fixing for
the pedestal works will be commenced as per the drawing.
 Placing and fixing of Anchor down bolts will be done. Each anchor bolt will be
aligned and fixed in line and true level as per required coordinates. All the bolts will
be secured rigidly and ensure it will not be disturbed during subsequent concrete
pouring activity.
 Shuttering of the pedestals will be fixed in line and level and rigid supports will be
ascertained to contain the concrete in required shape and size. Champers will be
provided on all four edges and on top.
 Champers of 35 x 35 mm, inclined length 50mm will be fixed in vertical and
horizontal corners for the exposed concrete only, i.e. for pedestal only. If chambers
not provided before concreting, it shall be done by use of grinders on post
concreting.

Page. 18 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Inspection for reinforcement, anchor bolts and form work will be raised for
approval.
 Upon approval concrete of required grade will be cast into pedestals and will ensure
proper compaction by concrete vibration needles. Concrete will be done with crane
bucket to prevent damage or disturbance to anchor bolts.
 Curing works will commence after concrete is set and will continue for 4 days.
 Form work will be stripped off after its stipulated time as per project specification.
 Application of Concrete protection material (Bitumen paint) over the entire
concrete surface area of foundations and pedestals up to finished floor level is done
in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendation.
 After the curing period, backfilling with the excavated soil will be laid in layers of
250mm loose with use of mechanical/manual methods, leveling and watering until
saturation and compacted to 200 mm thick to achieve 95% of proctor density. The
cycle will be repeated until required top levels are reached.

3.5 Deviation
The permissible Deviation Level/Tolerances for Finished concrete works shall be as
per Site Requirements / specifications / drawings.

4. QUALITY CONTROL:

The concrete work activities will be controlled using an Inspection Test Plan (ITP). The
ITP will be approved by the Consultants / Client and will include:
 Hold points for Consultant / Client Inspections.
 Frequency and Standard of Testing.
 Test Points for Independent Testing Agencies.
 Details of retained and non-retained documents.

5. PLANT & EQUIPMENT FOR EXCAVATION:

6.1 Plant and Machinery


 Excavator – 1 No.
 Crane – 1 No – wherever applicable
 Truck mounted crane -1 Nos
 Mini Roller / Plate compactor – 01 No.
 Dumper – as per site requirement.
 Dewatering pumps (if required) – 01No.
 Diesel Generators for Power supply.

6.2 Equipment (As per Site Requirements)


 Wheelbarrow

Page. 19 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Shovels/spades
 Scrapers & Pickaxe
 Jack hammer (Electric & pneumatic)

6.3 P.P.E.
 Hand gloves (Rubber, Cotton & Leather) & Safety goggles
 Safety boots (Boots with steel toe)
 Hard Hats
 Coverall/uniform
 Face shield
 Ear plugs

6.4 Miscellaneous
 Survey equipment - Auto Level and Total Station
 Small tools (Trimming & Leveling works)
 Fire Extinguishers
 Banks man / Riggers

6. SAFETY

 Site safety induction will be carried out as per EMAL EHS Rules and policy.
 All operative will receive a method statement briefing and this will be maintained
as a site record.
 All operative will maintain all the safety requirements for the project throughout the
work duration. This will include the wearing of Safety hats, High Visibility vests &
Safety boots and others as required for the job.
 Trained and Skilled Operators shall be employed for operating heavy machineries
like excavator, dumpers, cranes, etc.
 During Excavation process, a Signal Man shall be deployed in the surrounding area
of operating machineries to control the unauthorized access in the radius of
Machine Operating Zone.
 Scaffolding platforms and Ladder will be used as a safe means for access and
egress.
 Open excavations shall be barricaded by cordoned safety tape to secure the
excavating area and sufficient lighting arrangement shall be done in night to prevent
accidents and ensure safety.
 The Excavation area will be inspected through the Site safety personnel deputed at
site.

7. DUST CONTROL

Page. 20 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 Water Sprinkling shall be made to prevent flying of Dust and Polluting during the
Excavation activities.
 All Labors working in the Vicinity shall be provided with Dust mask as a
precaution against dust pollution.

8. APPENDICES

APPENDIX-A

METHOD STATEMENT- BRIEFING REGISTER

Project: EMIRATES ALUMINIUM SMELTER PROJECT Sheet No:

Date: Time: Delivery by:

Induction Type: Task Specific (Detail): Construction of Anode Storage Building

# I have been briefed of the contents of the above method statement, site safety and
Excavation, Backfill and Compaction and the entire sequence of construction of Pile cap
foundations work requirements. I fully understand all that has been said to me. I have also had
the opportunity to raise any queries relating to the work that is to be carried out.
EMPLOYER
NO. NAME (PRINT) SIGNATURE PAYROLL NO
(PRINT)

Page. 21 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
1
2

METHOD STATEMENT FOR PCC WORKS

Page. 22 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

OBJECTIVE:

To carry out reinforced concrete work regarding quality, quantity, handling, storage of
ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing, and testing of concrete. METHOD STATEMENT
covers the transportation of concrete mixer to the place of final deposit and placing, curing,
protecting, and finishing of concrete.

REFERENCE:

1. Inspection and Test Plan, Technical specification, BOQ, Relevant IS codes.


2. Client / Consultant Approved Drawings

EQUIPMENTS:

1. Concrete batching plant, Concrete pump, Transit mixers, immersion vibrator needles, mason
tools- spade, mortar pan, Aluminum straight edge, wooden float, steel float, Auto level, etc.…

CONCRETE PREPARATION:

Page. 23 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
Ensure all the materials are as per requirement / specification.
All reinforced concrete work shall be Design Mix Concrete as defined in IS: 456.Mix
proportioning shall be carried out in accordance with IS 10262, submitted and get approved by
the consultants.

Proportions of cement, coarse aggregate and fine aggregates shall be maintained during
subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers. The different sizes of aggregates
shall be stacked at different stockpiles.

The concrete shall be produced only by weigh batching. The entire content of the drum shall be
discharged in one operation before the raw materials for the succeeding batches are fed into the
drum.
The accuracy of the weigh batcher shall be periodically checked. Each batch shall be mixed until
the concrete is uniform in color.

No concrete shall be placed on a water covered surface. Before leaving unattended, the work
shall be covered with tarpaulins immediately after the concrete has been placed and compacted
to safeguard against damages caused by rain.

PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE:

Before placement of concrete the surface to be cleaned properly and leveled.


The leveled surface to be treated with Ant termite application as per the requirement.
Before the concrete is placed in position the insides of the formwork shall be inspected to see
that they have been cleaned and oiled. All embedment’s such to be cast in the concrete as
indicated in the drawings shall be correctly positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent
displacement during deposition and vibration of concrete.
All works shall be inspected and approved prior to the placement of the concrete. All the
equipment used for transporting the concrete such as transit mixers, wheel borrows shall be
watertight. All equipment used for mixing, transportation and placing shall be maintained in
clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipelines, and other equipment shall be
thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.
The concrete shall be compacted during placing with wooden rammers/equipment until the
concrete has been compacted properly.

CURING:

Concrete surface continuously wet for a minimum period of 07 days from the date of placing the
concrete. The curing is preferred continuously by saturated coverings of sacks, canvas, hessian,
or other absorbent materials. No concrete shall be placed on a water covered surface. Before
leaving unattended, the work shall be covered with tarpaulins immediately after the concrete has
been placed and compacted to safeguard against damages caused by rain.

Page. 24 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Sl. No.
Procedure
Responsibility
Check By
Record

2 PLACEMENTS OF CONCRETE

2.1 Before placement of concrete the surface to be cleaned properly and leveled.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/03

2.2 The leveled surface to be treated with Ant termite application as per the requirement.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/03

2.3 Before the concrete is placed in position the insides of the formwork shall be inspected to see
that they have been cleaned and oiled. All embedment’s such to be cast in the concrete as indicated
in the drawings shall be correctly positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent
displacement during deposition and vibration of concrete.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/03
All works shall be inspected and approved prior to the placement of the concrete.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/03
All the equipment’s used for transport the concrete such as transit mixers, wheel
borrows shall be watertight. All equipment used for mixing, transportation and placing
shall be maintained in clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipelines,
and other equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.
Site Engineer
QAP/03
The concrete shall be compacted during placing with wooden rammers/equipment until
the concrete has been compacted properly.
Site Engineer

3 CURING
Curing shall be done by keeping the QC QC Engineer QF/CPC/01

Page. 25 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
fresh concrete surface continuously Engineer
wet for a minimum period of 07 days
from the date of placing the concrete.
The curing is preferred continuously by
saturated coverings of sacks, canvas,
hessian, or other absorbent materials.

Page. 26 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR RCC WORKS

OBJECTIVE:

Page. 27 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
To carry out reinforced concrete work in regard to quality, quantity, handling, storage of
ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing of concrete and also requirements in
regard to the quality, storage, cutting, bending and fixing of reinforcement in position. This also
covers the transportation of concrete mixer to the place of final deposit and placing, curing,
protecting and finishing of concrete.

REFERENCE:

1. Inspection and Test Plan, Technical specification, BOQ, Relevant IS codes.


2. Client / Consultant Approved Drawings

EQUIPMENTS:

1. Concrete batching plant, Concrete pump, Transit mixers, immersion vibrator needles, mason
tools- spade, mortar pan, Aluminum straight edge, wooden float, steel float, Auto level, etc.…

CONCRETE PREPARATION:

 Ensure all the materials are as per requirement / specification.


 All reinforced concrete work shall be Design Mix Concrete as defined in IS: 456.Mix
proportioning shall be carried out in accordance with IS 10262, submitted and get
approved by the consultants.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
Mix design format.

 Standard deviation of each grade of concrete shall be determined separately. The total
number of test results required constituting and acceptable record for calculation of
standard deviation shall be not less than 30.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
QF/STD/01
 Proportions of cement, coarse aggregate and fine aggregates shall be maintained during
subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers. The different sizes of
aggregates shall be stacked at different stockpiles.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer

Page. 28 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
 The concrete shall be produced only by weigh batching. The entire content of the drum
shall be discharged in one operation before the raw materials for the succeeding batches
are fed into the drum.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
 The accuracy of the weigh batcher shall be periodically checked. Each batch shall be
mixed until the concrete is uniform in color.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
No concrete shall be placed on a water covered surface. Before leaving unattended, the work
shall be covered with tarpaulins immediately after the concrete has been placed and compacted
to safeguard against damages caused by rain.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer

All works shall be inspected and approved prior to the placement of the concrete.
Site Engineer
Sl. No.
Procedure
Responsibility
Check By
Record

2.0 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE

2.1 Before the concrete is placed in position the insides of the formwork shall be inspected to see
that they have been cleaned and oiled. All embedment’s such to be cast in the concrete as
indicated in the drawings shall be correctly positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent
displacement during deposition and vibration of concrete. Slots, openings, holes, pockets, dowels
etc. shall be provided as indicated in the drawings. Reinforcements and other items to be cast in
concrete shall have clean surfaces that will not impair bond.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/04

2.2 QAP/04
QC Engineer
QAP/04
All the equipment used for transporting the concrete such as transit mixers, wheel borrows shall
be watertight. All equipment used for mixing, transportation and placing shall be maintained in

Page. 29 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipelines, and other equipment shall be
thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
QAP/04
The concrete shall be compacted during placing with vibrating equipment until the concrete has
been consolidated to the maximum practicable density.
The use of vibrators shall be consistent with the concrete mix and caution is to be exercised not
to over vibrate the concrete to the point that segregation results. The immersion vibrator shall
penetrate the layer being placed and also penetrate the layer below while the under layer is still
plastic to ensure good bond and homogeneity between the two layers and prevent the formation
of cold joints. Immersion vibrators shall not be allowed to meet the reinforcement steel, forms,
and finished surfaces.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS:

If stopping of concrete becomes unavoidable anywhere, proper construction joints shall be


provided in the position described on the drawing. If not described in the drawing, then the
procedure in the technical specification shall be followed.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/04

4. TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION JOINT:

All laitance and loose stones shall be removed by hacking, wire brushing and surface wash. Just
before concreting the cleaned surface shall receive a thin layer of cement grout of specified
proportion. The new concrete shall be well worked against the prepared face before the grout
sets. Special care should be taken so that no segregation takes place along the joint plane.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
QAP/04

5. FINISHING OF CONCRETE:

Floating or toweling of the finish shall be permitted only after all surface water has evaporated.
Finished surfaces shall present a uniform and smooth appearance.
Site Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/04

Page. 30 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

6. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH TEST:

The sample from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS 1199, cubes shall be made, cured and
tested at 28 days in accordance with IS 516. The minimum frequency of sampling shall be in
accordance with the clause 15.2.2 of IS 456 2000. Slump test shall be carried out as required and
invariably from the same batch of concrete from which the test cubes are made. Slump test shall
be done immediately after sampling. Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/04

7. CURING:

The curing of horizontal surface exposed to drying winds however shall begin immediately after
the concrete has hardened. For curing of concrete in pavements, floors, flat roofs or other level
surfaces, the ponding method of curing is preferred. For curing of vertical structural members
continuously saturated coverings of sacks, canvas, hessian, or other absorbent materials.
QC Engineer
QC Engineer
QAP/04

Curing shall be done by keeping the fresh concrete surface continuously wet for a minimum
period of 14 days from the date of placing the concrete.

Page. 31 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

METHOD STATEMENT FOR FORMWORK WORKS

OBJECTIVE:

The Formwork shall consist of shores, bracings, side of beams and columns, bottom of slabs, etc.
including ties, anchors, hangars, inserts, etc. complete which shall be properly designed and
planned for the works.

REFERENCE:

Page. 32 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
1.Inspection and Test Plan, Technical specification, BOQ, Relevant IS codes.
2. Client / Consultant Approved Drawings

EQUIPMENTS & MATERIALS: Circular saw, planning machine, Leveling instrument,


Plumb bob, Right angle, Line thread, hammer, Nails.
Sl. No.
Procedure
Responsibility
Check By
Record

1.DESIGN OF FORMWORK

1.1 The drawings and calculations for the design of the formwork for Footing, Column,
Slab, Tie beams, Plinth beams shall be submitted and get approval by the Client / Consultant.
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

1.2 The design shall take in to account all the loads vertical as well as lateral loads that
the forms will be carrying including live load and vibration loads.
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

1.3 Depending upon the height of the staging suitable vertical and horizontal cross
bracings shall be provided.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

1.4 The concrete work of floor, beam, slab including roof slab shall be permitted after
inspection staging work.
Site Engineer

2 TYPE OF FORMWORK

Formwork may be of timber, plywood or metal. For special finishes the formwork may be lined
with smooth faced plywood, steel sheets, oil tempered hard board, etc. Sliding forms and slip
forms may be used. Approved formwork system shall be used.
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

3 FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS

Page. 33 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
3.1.1 Formwork system shall confirm to the shapes, lines, grades, levels and dimensions.
Ample studs, wailer braces, ties, straps, shores, etc. shall be used to hold the forms in proper
position. Form shall be strong enough to the use of immersion vibrator. The shuttering shall be
close boarded. Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of water and fine material from
concrete.
Site Engineer
QA/QC Engineer

Sl. No.
Procedure
Responsibility
Check By
Record

3.1.2 Inside faces of forms for concrete surface, which are to be rubbed finished shall be
planned to remove irregularities or unevenness in the face. Formwork with lining will be
permitted.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

a) 3.1.3 All formwork shall be maintained in a good condition with respect to shape,
strength, rigidity, water tightness, smoothness, and cleanliness of surfaces.
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

b) 3.1.4 Form work during any stage of construction showing signs of distortion or
disturbed to such a degree that the intended concrete work will not conform to the exact
contours indicated on the drawings shall be re-positioned and strengthened.
Formwork Engineer
QA/QC Engineer

3.1.5 Foam shall be provided at starters and 2nd lift of shuttering to avoid slurry leakage.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.1.6 Formwork scheme & shuttering design to be attached with the method statement
(column, foundation, beams, wall & slab separately)
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

3.1.7 De shuttering method to be explained prior to start of the activity.


Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

3.1.8 All formwork joints shall be taped to avoid slurry leakage.

Page. 34 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
Formwork Engineer
Site Engineer

3.1.9 The scaffolding, working platform and access shall be ensured as per JSA.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2 The quality of formwork components shall be ensured before use.


Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.1 The reinforcement of Foundation, beams, columns, and walls shall be checked
including cover prior to placing the formwork from the Client/QC Engineer.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.2 No supports shall be provided directly from the soil.


Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.3 The tightening of tie rods & props shall be checked before concreting.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.4 The formwork of slab shall be checked for line, level & dimension before placing
the reinforcement steel form the Client/QC Engineer.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

1) 3.2.5 The rectification of shuttering board quality shall be checked and allowed by the
Construction Manager.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.6 The top level of the concrete shall be marked on the shutters to ensure the uniform
level of the concrete.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

3.2.7 The maximum height of pour of the column to be mentioned.


Site Engineer
Site Engineer

Sl. No.
Procedure

Page. 35 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
Responsibility
Check By
Record

4 BRACINGS, STRUTS AND PROPS:

4.1 Shuttering shall be braced, strutted, propped and so supported that it shall not deform
underweight and pressure of the concrete and also due the movement of men and other materials.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

4.2 The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the shuttering on the sides of the
beams and under the soffit of slab can be removed without disturbing the beam bottoms.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

4.3 Re-propping of the beam shall not be done except when the props must be reinstalled to take
care of construction loads anticipated being in excess of the design load. Vertical props shall be
supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken whereby the props can be gently lowered
vertically while striking the shuttering.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

5. FORM OIL

5.1 Form oil used as mould releasing agent to be used which shall not adversely affect the
concrete.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

5.2
Care shall be taken that oil or such similar material is kept out of contact with the reinforcement.
Before treatment with oil, forms shall be thoroughly cleaned of dried splatter of concrete from
placement of previous lift.
Site Engineer

6
REUSE OF FORMS

6.1
Before reuse all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes that may leak
suitably plugged and joints examined and when necessary repaired and the inside retreated to
prevent adhesion to the satisfaction.

Page. 36 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

7
REMOVAL OF FORMS

7.1
In normal circumstances where the ambient temperature does not fall below 15°C and where
Ordinary Portland Cement is used and adequate curing is done, the stripping time is to be
followed as specified in IS: 456-2000 i.e.
a) Vertical formwork to column, walls, beams – 16 to 24 hours.
b) Soffit to formwork to slabs (Props to be re fixed immediately after removal of formwork). - 3
days
c) Soffit formwork to beams (Props to be re fixed immediately after removal of formwork). - 7
days
d) Props to slab:
1) Spanning up to 4.5 m - 7 days
2)Spanning over 4.5m - 14days c) Props to beams and arches:
1) Spanning up to 6m - 14 days
2) Spanning over 6 m - 21 days
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
QF/CPC/01
7.2
Striking shall be done slowly with utmost care to avoid damage to corner and projections and
without shock or vibration by gently easing the wedges. If after removing the formwork, if it is
found that formwork has been embedded in the concrete, it shall be removed and made good as
specified earlier.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
QF/CPC/01
7.3
No Concrete structure shall be loaded until the concrete is at least 21 days old and only then with
the approval of Client.
Site Engineer
Site Engineer
Site Engineer

Page. 37 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Page. 38 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Page. 39 Construction
Medothodology
ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LIMITED

Page. 40 Construction
Medothodology
 
 

ENGINEERING PROJECTS (INDIA) LTD.


(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

GENERAL FIELD QUALITY PLAN

Execution of civil & structural works and


Allied work at All sites

1   

 
 
 

QUALITY ASSURANCE:- All those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide Confidence that an item or facility
will perform satisfactorily in service

QUALITY CONTROL - Those quality assurance actions that provide a means to control and measure against established
requirements the characteristics of an item, process, or

History of Revisions
Revision Revision Chapter / clause
No. Issue date no. & test affected Reason for revision

2   

 
 
 

FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENTS

Sr. Name of the equipment Elements Calibration Frequency


NO. for calibration Agency of Calibration
1. The dolomite / Total Venire plates 3rd party Yearly

2. Leveling Instrument 3rd party Yearly

3. Leveling Instrument Weighing capacity 3rd party Yearly

4. Cube testing machine – Pressure/load gauge 3rd party Six monthly


manually operated.
5. Batching plant Dial gauge/load shell Site Six monthly

6. Weigh Batcher Weighing scale Site Six monthly

Note: These frequencies are indicative. In case of intermediate deviations or repairs, immediate calibration shall be undertaken

3   

 
 
 

STANDARD LIST OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TO BE MOBILIZED


S. No. Name of Equipment
1 Pan Balance – Capacity 500gm
2 Platform Balance – Capacity 30 KG
3 Concrete cube model with tamping rod size – 150mm x 150mm
4 Vicat Apparatus
5 Motor cube with base plates – size 70.6mm x 70.6mm
6 Wheel borrows – 01 No.
7 Humidity meter N/A
8 Measuring cylinder – 500m1
9 Measuring cylinder – 250 Ml
10 Flakiness & elongation index gauge N/A
11 Slump cone apparatus with measuring rod
12 Sieves for coarse Aggregate – G.I. 18’ dia (63mm, 50mm, 40mm, 31.5mm, 25mm, 20mm, 16mm, 12.5mm, 10mm,
8mm, 6.3mm, 4.75mm, 2.36mm) set of 13
13 Sieves for fine Aggregate - Brass sieve (4.75mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 600 micron, 300 micron, 150 micron, 75 micron
lid & pan) Set of 8.
14 Pycnometer bottle – N/A
15 Hot oven
16 Cube testing machine
17 Thermometer 0° - 250°c N/A
18 G.I. Tray – 45cm x 45cm
19 G.I. Tray – 45cm x 60cm
20 Core cutter with dolly & rammer N/A
21 Procter compaction mound with light rammer of 269 Kg – N/A
22 Sand Pouring Apparatus – N/A
23 Wire gauge basket – N/A
24 Le – Chatelier’s mold – N/A
25 Vibrating machine for cement cube mold – N/A
26 90 micron sieve for cement test
27 Sieve shaker
28 45 micron sieve for cement test
29 ACT curing Tank

4   

 
 
 

Quality
Assurance Plan

5   

 
 
 

1.0 Engineering Projects (India) Ltd., (EPI) has developed its own quality system to meet required quality standard
and time schedule. In order to adhere to quality standards at every stage of construction activities, QUALITY
ASSURANCE PLAN is being introduced at site to ensure quality product

2.0 Quality Assurance plan consists of all the planned and systematic actions to be undertaken by EPI involved in
execution and acceptance of the works as per the contract. The plan shall define the operations to be performed, the
systematic and sequential progression of operations, the persons responsible for each activity and the measures
employed to assure the specific quality requirement. Thus, it is imperative to ensure that product and services are
inspected, checked and approved at all stages from commencement of work including receipt of material to its
completion in so far as utilization.

3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURE

Efforts for quality assurance shall be made at following phases.

a) Pre-construction phase
b) During construction phase 1
c) Post Construction phase

3.1 QUALITY CONTROL DURING PRE-CONSTRUCT ION PHASE:

During this phase various activities shall be undertaken and system shall be put in place and implemented in order to
ensure that:
 
a) All activities, at all locations begin as planned in time.
b) The support system is efficient enough to sustain the quality and progress of work as planned.
c) Quality and progress at all times during construction phase remain unaffected and unhindered.

6   

 
 
 

3.1.1. MATERIAL:

It will be ensured that all materials going into the system have been inspected & material test certificates for each of the
material (MTC) (wherever applicable) is available. The untested materials are properly identified with a tag of 'material
under inspection' and rejected maternal shall be disposed.

3.1.2. FIELD LAB SETUP:

In order to craft ‘out day to day testing of incoming materials, field laboratory shall be set up with calibrated instruments.
Lab assistant having practical experience and quality engineer having minimum diploma in civil engineering will operate
the Lab and they will report to lab in charge.

3.1.3. PLANT AND MACHINERY:

Utmost care shall be taken that necessary plant and equipment’s are well maintained and in working Condition prior to
being put into the use. Weigh batcher etc. shall be kept calibrated during commissioning and before operation. Well-
trained staff will control the operation and maintenance of all plant and machinery.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION:

This is the most critical phase of quality control. This is ensured by allotting responsibilities to concerned engineers with
commensurate authority and supervisors with commensurate authority at execution and closely monitored by execution
in-charge and QA/QC Engineer to ensure a Total quality product at all times. This can be achieved as per specification
given by client.

Special products and works involving specialized agencies will be controlled by execution engineers and QA/QC Engineer
as per stipulated quality criteria.

7   

 
 
 

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL AT POST CONSTRUCTION:

After the process is completed, thorough inspection and testing shall be carried out to ensure that finished product is
conforming to specified standards. Required quality records shall be documented in prescribed documents to demonstrate
the achievements of specified quality and effectiveness of quality system.

3.4 QUALITY AUDIT:

A separate set of forms with detailed instructions are laid down for facilitating the audit of the quality assurance by an
independent unit of Regional /Corporate office at every 6 months periodical intervals.

4.0 SAFETY:

All quality measures relevant for the activity will be put in place to ensure that quality work is performed under the
supervision of the work leader. Training & daily pep talks on quality to all workmen will be conducted before start of the
activity.

8   

 
 
 

Procedure for handing over of warranty/guarantee of civil works

Details of all the warranty/Guarantee documents of various work as applicable shall be recorded mentioning start of
warranty/guarantee period and the duration for which warrantee/guarantee is being given. Signature of the concerned
MSME / Consultants official with date shall be obtained on the hand over documents. One copy of the record of handover
copy shall be handed over to MSME and one copy shall be retained.

Format for handing over of warranty/guarantee of civil works

Sl. Description Duration of Warranty/Guarantee Remarks


No of work Warranty/Guarantee start date

Handed Over by Received by

9   

 
 
 

Inspection & Test Plans

10   

 
 
 

The following materials of construction shall be inspected, tested, and results documented and/or verified by agency
personnel in accordance with the following charts and Testing Frequency

Quality Plan for the Construction material and Process


CEMENT (33 / 43 / 53 GRADE)

SR IS
Internal / External Specification Level of
. Parameters reference Acceptance Norms
Laboratory test requirements Control
NO standard

1 Grade Internal test 33/43/53 Grade Test Certificate


How old the date It should not cross 30 days Verification of
of manufacturing from the manufacturing date Printed week, month
Freshness Should be? NA & year
2
Test
After every
Lump test No limp should be present Physical verification 2000 No. of
bags, one
3 A) By sieving I.S. 1489 Percentage retained
Freshness bag send to
External Lab Test through 90 micron I.S. (Part)-I- shall not be more
Test laboratory
Sieve 1991 than 10.

On site It should feel silky Physical verification


Silky Feeling to the
fingers after rubbing
in fingers

11   

 
 
 

REINFORCEMENT STEEL FE500D


SR. Parameters Internal / External Specified IS reference Acceptance Level of
NO Laboratory Test requirements standard Norms control

1 Mark on steel
Tested for 3 no
TOR marking should be rolled on every
a) Tor steel On site Visual Inspection of bars
meter length
2 Pitch of twist of bar Ext Lab 8 to 12 times of Test certificate
nominal
3 Colour On site Steel gray Visual inspection
4 Weight per meter On site Theoretical weight Per lot
length
1. 6mm dia. Bar 0.22 kg/m
Practically actual
2. 8mm dia. Bar 0.39 kg/3
weight should not
3. 10mm dia. Bar 0.62 kg/3
vary more than 5%
4. 12mm dia. Bar 0.89 kg/3
5. 16mm dia. Bar 1.58 kg/3
6. 20mm dia. Bar 2.47 kg/3

5 Elongation Ext lab In % (on gauge FACTORY TC


length of 5.65 A 1786 – 1979 Not less than
Where A = cross (II revision) 14.5%
Sectional area
6 Proof Stress 0.2 PERCENT PROOF Not less than 415
1786 – 1979
STRESS – EXT lab n / mm2
(II revision)
7 Tensile Strength Ext lab Minimum 15%
1786 – 1979 more than the
(II revision) actual 0.2
percent stress.

12   

 
 
 

SAND (FINE AGGREGATES)

Internal /
Sr. External IS reference standard Level of
Parameters Specified requirements
No. Laboratory Acceptance Norms control
test

F.M. may range between 2.6 %


FINENESS
to 3.6 % for concrete up to 1.6
MODULUS On Site 386 - 1963 Every truck lead
% for plastering and up to 3%
(F.M.) ON SITE Test
for masonry.
Report
If silt convent exceeds 4% by
SILT CONTENT On Site weight then it should be washed 386 - 1963
before use.

WOODEN DOOR FRAME. SAL I TEAK WOOD I BURMA TEAK WOOD

SR. Parameters Internal/ Specified IS reference Level of


NO External requirements standard Acceptance control
Laborator Norms
y test

Size As per Drawing Dimensional 100%


/order inspection
2 Section of wood As per Drawing I
order

13   

 
 
 

3 colour of wood As per Specified


quality OR shed
4 type of wood Sal Wood / Teak Visual inspection
wood / C.P.Teak /
Burma teak wood
or per required.

5 diagonal of frame Both Should be Visual inspection


Correct.

6 Right angle of frame (both Both Should in Visual inspection


90degrees.

7 Edges of frame Sharp Visual inspection


8 Depth of Shutter notch As Per drawing Dimensional
inspection
9 Length of horn on either side As Per Dimensional
drawing(min.31) Inspection
10 No. of bracings 4 Nos.50 X 25mm 100%
(2' X Nat 45* 2 nos.)
a) Top
50 X 25 mm
b) Centre (2-X1') path
M.S. angle 25
c) Bottom mm x 25mm x
5mm or as per
requirement

14   

 
 
 

11 Presence of holes/ Cracks I Should be Free from Visual inspection


Knot / all detects
Termites and bends.

12 Checking of pints It should be as per Dimensional


drawing inspection

COARSE AGGREGATES (METALS)


SR.NO. LABORATORY PHYSICAL RELEVANT Acceptance Level of control
TEST REQUIREMENT LS.CODE Criteria
1 Site Lab % g passing should be 85 to 2385 – 1963
Sieve Analysis 100% of respective size (Part IV)
2 (a) Shall not exceed 45% Sieve analysis – On
for Aggregates used for site
AGGREGATE concrete other than for
wearing coat. (b) Shall 23865 – 1963
CRUSHING
not exceed 30% by (Part IV)
VALUE
Weight for concrete
wearing surfaces. External Lab
Test
3 External (a) Shall not exceed 45% Certificate for
lab by Weight for concrete Mix Design.
other than for wearing
AGGREGATE 2386 – 1963
surface. (b) Shall not
IMPACT VALUE (Part IV)
exceed 30% by Weight
for concrete wearing
surfaces.
4 AGGREGATE (a) Shall not exceed 50%
2386 – 1963
ABRASION For Aggregates to be
(Part IV)
VALUE used in concrete other
15   

 
 
 

than for wearing surface.


(b) Shall not exceed
30% Aggregates to be
used in concrete for
wearing surfaces.
5
Flakeeness and 2387 – 1963
(Max 30%)
Elongation Index (Part IV)

BRICKS( COMMON BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS)

SR.NO. Parameters Internal I Specified IS reference Accept Level of


External requirements standard ance control
Laboratory Norms
test

COMPRESIVE On site Average 1077 - 1976 On site 5 Nos.


1 STRENGTH compressive
strength not less
a) Average than 35 kg/cm2

Not less than 20 1077 –


b) Individual % of minimum 1976
Average

WATER ABSORPTION Shall not be more 1077 -1976


2 than moderate

EFFLORESCENCE Shall not be more 1077 - 1976


3 Iran moderate

16   

 
 
 

M S Rolling Shutter
SR.N Paramet Internal I External Specified Level
O ers Laboratory test requirements IS ref. standard of
Acceptance Norms control
1 Type of the shutter Pull and push type 100%

2 Gauge of bottom lock Plate and Should be as per Dimn inspection- 100%
locking arrangement purchase order Vernier caliper &
3 Type of section used for laths with 16 / 18 120 gauge or Dims inspection - 100 %
gauge should be as per Vernier caliper &
purchase order Gauge
4 Check shutter laths in 30 cm. length 4 to 4 No. or as per Dimn inspection 100%
drawing
5 Top cover in the piece with center ally In one piece of 20 / 22 / Visual inspect= 100%
supported plate and its gauge 24
6 Diameter of ball bearing and spring Check no. and size as Dimensional inspection 100%
with their No. per order
7 M.S. pipe shaft diameter Generally 40 mm of 14 Dimensional inspection 100%
gauge or as per order
8 Bracket plates and guide rail As per Order Visual inspection 10C%

9 Stoppers on each side As per Order Visual inspection 100%


10 Handle 2 Nos. riveted or as per Visual inspection 100%
order
11 I told last at equal distance 30 cm .in length and 3 Visual inspection 100%
12 Red oxide Uniform one coal Visual inspection 100%

17   

 
 
 

13 Extra locking arrangement 1 No. in centre or as per Visual inspection 100%


order
14 overall fin6hing / fixing /locking Should be neat and Visual inspection 100%
operation proper
15 All (gimp , fixtures etc. In right angle , in line Visual inspection 100%
and level
16 Greasing for spring and guide rails Should be sufficient Checking 100%
for smooth
operation.

Aluminum Window

SR.N Parameters Internal / Specified requirements IS ref standard Acceptance Lev


O External Norms el
Laboratory test of
con
trol
1 Size As per drawing Dimensional 100%
Inspection
2 Diagonal and plumb Should be perfect

3 Section / accessories used for mullion tracks as mentioned in drawings Checking 100%
shutters interlocking
4 Fixing work Should be proper with Checking
Screws
5 Check for necessary Position and rubber / It should be located as per Checking 100%
P.V.C. Packing for glass drawing

18   

 
 
 

6 Check for quality of glass , aluminum section as per specification Checking


coating etc.

7 make of aluminum section used. As specified Checking 100%

8 Sliding of glass panels smooth Checking 100%

9 Scratches I tend / cracks(if any ) Free from all detects Visual inspection 100%

10 Propert fixing in wall opening Side gap should not be Visual inspection 100%
there (if any . filled with
gap filler )

11 Provision of drain holes in window bottom Should be provided as per Visual inspection 100%
channel. drawings

Plumbing G.I. Pipes and Fittings

SR. Parameters Internal 1 Specified IS Acceptance Level of


NO External requirements referenc Norms control
Laboratory test e
standard

Brands Siddharth , Zenith, Swastik, Std pipes of ISI Mark 100%

19   

 
 
 

1 Class / diameter / wall It should be Visual 100%


thickness marked with inspection
proper colour
makings and
thickness as per
class
2 Defects Free from any Visual
cracks inspection

Length and size As per purchase Standard 100%


order

Ceramic I Glazed Tiles

SR.NO Parameters Internal I Specified IS ref. standard Level of


External requirements Acceptance Norms control
Laboratory
Kajaria, Johnson, Nitco,
RAK, Specto, Simpolo,
Oscar, Clyers
1 Size , colour . As specified PREMIUM Visual inspection 10%
quality quality

2 Diagonal of tiles both diagonals should be Visual inspection


perfect
3 Edges / right Should be correct and Visual inspection 10%
angles perfect
4 Evenness in top Should be smooth and Visual inspection 10%
layer even

20   

 
 
 

5 Straightness of Should be straight Visual inspection 10%


tiles
6 Cracks. Cavities , Top layer should tree any Visual inspection 10%
holes defects
7 Corners Should straight and not Visual inspection 10%
broken
8 Thickness should not be less than 5 Visual inspection 10%
mm.

9 Top finishing Glazing Uniform and good Visual inspection 10%

GLAZED TILES
SR.NO Parameters Internal I Specified IS reference Level of
External requirements standardAcceptance control
Laboratory Norms
test

1 WATER ABSORPTION Shall not exceed 18% 777 - BRANDED


1970 TILES
Shall not show any sign 777 -
of crazing after two 1970
cycles of test in an
autoclave.

3 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Glazed surface (white or 777 -


cream )call 1970

show no deterioration

21   

 
 
 

Granite I Marble I Tandoor I Stone

SR. Parameters Internal I Specified IS reference standard level of


NO External requirements Acceptance Norms control
Laboratory
test

Brand Steel Grey, Egyptian Blue, Cadbury Brown, Rolite Brown, Coffee Brown.

1 Size, Colour , quality Should be of uniform Visual inspection 100%


colour , size and
quality as specified
2 Check for polishing One face should be Visual inspection 100%
gully and cutting polished with four
sides machine cut.

3 Edges , diagonal Edges should be Visual inspection 100%


straight and right
angles to each other
and diagonal should
be perfect

4 Performance of lop Should be free from Visual inspection 100%


Layer cracks , broken
edges , holes .
cavities etc.
5 Straightness Should be straight Visual inspection 100%

22   

 
 
 

6 Thickness Uniform thickness Dimensional Inspection 10% of lot

Water

SR. Parameters Internal I Specified IS Acceptance Norms Level of


NO External requirements reference control
Laborator standard
y test
1 pH value IS 3025, 6 to 9 One
2 sulphate content (mg/l) IS: 4031 400 max per 6
8 IS: 516 month
NA or
External chang
Lab Report e of
3 cloride content (rrig/l) Max 2000 for PCC source
Max 500 for RCC
4 Organic impurities (mg/l) 200 Max
5 Inorganic impurities (mg/l) 3000 Max
6 Suspended matters Max 2000
(mg/l)

7 Acidity (mg/l) 5 Max

Alkalinity (mg/l) 25 Max

Total dissolved solids (mg/l) 500 Max

Total Hardness (mg/l) 200 Max

23   

 
 
 

FLY ASH BRICKS


Sr.No Parameters Internal/External Specified IS Acceptance Level of
Laboratory test requirements referenc Norms control
e
standar
d
1 COMPRESIVE On site Average IS 12894 On site 5Nos
STRENGTH compressive
Average strength not less
than 50 kg /cm2

b) Individual Not less than


20% of minimum
Average required

2 WATER 20% MAX


ABSORPTION

ACC BLOCK
SR.No Parameters Internal /External Specified requirements IS reference Acceptance Level of control
Laboratory test standard Norms

24   

 
 
 

1 COMPRESIVE Average IS-6441 On Site 5 Nos


STRENGTH compressive PART 5
average strength not less
than 30 kg/cm2

b) Individual Not Less than 20% of


minimum Average
required

2 Dry Density 551-650 kg/cum IS-6441


PART 1

Dimensional Length+/-5mn IS-2185


tolerances part3 Fig 1

Breadth +/-3mn IS2185


part3 Fig 2

Height+/-3mn IS-2185
part 3 Fig.3

Mortar masonry/plaster/flooring work


SR.No Parameters Internal/External Specified requirements IS Acceptance Level of
Laboratory test reference Norms Control
standard
1 COMPRESIVE Compressive strength in
STRENGTH kg/cm2,CM1:4:-84 To 12;
A)Average CM1:55:-6 To 84;CM1:6:-36
On Site to 56 On Site 5 Nos

25   

 
 
 

b) Individual Not less than 20% of


minimum Average required

AAC Blocks joint mortar


SR. Parameters Internal/E Specified IS reference Acceptance Norms Level of
No xternal requirements standard Control
Laboratory
test
1 COMPRESIVE MTC 7days – BS EN 1015:-1999 MTC
STRENGTH 6.93N/mm2
28day – 12.6
N/mm2
2 DRY MTC MIN ONE N/MM2 AS PER BS EN 1348 MTC
ADHESION
STRENGTH
(N/MM2)
3 TENSIE MTC AS PER BS EN 1015 MTC
ADHESION PART -9
STRENGTH
(N/mm2)
4 WORKABLE MTC AS PER BS EN 1015 MTC
LIFE PART - 9

26   

 
 
 

Pile Testing Methodology

Pile testing shall be done as specified in IS 2911 (Part-4-2013)


Following two types of tests shall be carried out for each type of loading (that is Vertical, Lateral and pull out)
1. Initial test: It will be carried on one or more test piles, which are not working piles and will be installed separately,
for determining ultimate load capacity and safe load capacity by applying factor of safety.
i) The initial test load shall not be less than the estimated safe load multiply by the minimum factor of safety of 2.5.
ii) The number of tests shall be minimum of two tests for each diameter of piles and rated capacity of pile in each type
of loading.
iii) Initial test pile shall be installed by same technic, same type of equipment as that propose for working piles.
iv) Initial pile load tests shall be carried out before execution of piling job.

2. Routine test: It will be carried out on a working pile/pile group to check capability of pile to take the working load
assigned to it without exceeding permissible limit, detection of any unusual performance and workmanship. Number of
test shall be 0.5% of the total number of piles subject to minimum one test for each type of loading (that is vertical,
lateral, pullout) for each diameter of pile and rated capacity of pile.

General requirement applicable to all types of tests:-


i) Pile test shall be carried out on a single pile or a group of piles as required.
ii) The load application and deflection measurement will be made at the pile top.
iii) The test shall be carried out at cut-off level where ever practicable.
iv) The test piles shall be installed by the same technique with same type of equipment as required for the working
piles.

27   

 
 
 

v) For pile test on a group of piles, caps shall be provided such that the requirement condition of actual use are full
filled.
vi) Deflection shall be measured preferably at the pile top. Datum bars should rest on firm ground.

A) Vertical Load test (Compression):-


Compression load shall be applied to the pile top by means of a hydraulic jack against rolled steel joist or suitable load
frame with adequate kentledge and the settlement recorded by suitably positioned dial gauges. Maintained load method
shall be used for determination of safe load. The general requirements of the test are given below:

a). Preparation of pile head: For carrying out the test pile head shall be chipped off to natural horizontal plane till
sound concrete is met. The projecting reinforcement shall be cut off or bent suitably and the top finished smooth &
made level with cement plaster. A bearing plate with a mark at the center shall be placed on the head of the piles for
the jacks to rest. Finished pile head level will be measured prior to and after the load test by suitable survey instrument.

b) Application of load: The test shall be carried out by applying a series of vertical downward incremental load each
increment being of about 20% of safe load on the pile.

c) Reaction: The reaction shall be obtained from kentledge placed on a platform supported clear of the test pile. The
center of gravity of the kentledge should coincide the axis of the piles and the load applied by the jack should be coaxial
with the pile.
The reaction for the test should be 25% more than the final test load proposed to the applied.

d) Settlement : Settlement shall be recorded with minimum four dial gauges of 0.01 mm sensitivity for both single
pile & group. The dial gauge shall be each positioned symmetrically at equal distance around the piles and held by
datum bars resting on immovable supports at a distance of 3D (subject to minimum of 2.0 meter) from the edge of
the piles, where D is the diameter of the piles.

28   

 
 
 

e) The safe vertical load of single pile for the initial test shall be least of the following:
1. For piles upto and including 600mm diameter
i) 2/3 of the final load at which the total displacement attains a value of 12mm
ii) 50% of the final load at which the total displacement equals 7.5% of bulb diameter

2. For piles more than 600mm diameter


i) 2/3 of the final load at which the total displacement attains a value of 18mm or 2% of pile diameter whichever is less.
ii) 50% of the final load at which the total displacement equals 7.5% of bulb diameter

F) Routine test shall be carried for a test load of at least 1.5 times the working load :
The maximum settlement at the test load been not greater than 12mm for piles diameter upto and including 600mm
and 18mm or 2% of the pile diameter whichever is less for piles of diameter more than 600mm.
The safe vertical load on group of piles for initial test shall be least of the following:
i) Final load at which the total displacement attains value of 25mm.
ii) 2/3 of the final load at which the total displacement attains value of 40mm.
iii) Routine test of group of piles shall be carried for a test load of atleast equal to the working load :
The maximum settlement of the test loading in position being not exceeding 25mm.

Maintained load method for vertical load test:-


This will be applied for both initial & routine test. Application of increment of test load and taking of measurement of
displacement in each stage of loading is maintained till rate of movement of the pile top is not more than 0.2mm per
hour or till two hours have elapsed whichever is earlier subject to a minimum of one hour. The maximum test load shall
be maintained for 24 hours.

Duration of vertical loading:


1. Vertical loading on single pile shall be continue till one of the following takes place:
a) Incase of initial load test:
i) Applied load reaches 2.5 times the safe estimated load or

29   

 
 
 

ii) maximum settlement of pile exceeds a value of 7.5% of bulb diameter.

2. Incase of routine load test:


i) Applied load reaches 1.5 times the working load or
ii) Maximum settlement of pile exceeds a value of 12mm for piles diameter up to and including 600mm and 18mm or
maximum of 2% of pile diameter whichever is less for piles of diameter more than 600mm, whichever is earlier.

3. Vertical load in group of piles shall be continue till one of the following takes place:
a) Incase of initial load test:
i) Applied load reaches 2.5 times the safe estimated load or
ii) Maximum settlement of piles exceed a value of 40mm
b) Incase of routine load test:
i) Applied load reaches the working load or
ii) Maximum settlement of pile exceed a value of 25mm
.
B) Lateral load test on piles:
i) The test will be carried out by introducing a hydraulic jack with gauge between two piles or pile groups and the full
load imposed by jack shall be taken in as the lateral resistance of each pile of group.
The loading shall be applied in increments of about 20% of the estimated safe load.
ii) The next increment shall be applied after the rate of displacement is less than or equal to 0.1mm per 30 minutes
subject to minimum of 30 minutes.
iii) Displacement shall be recorded by using dial gauge of 0.01mm sensitivity. Placed diametrically opposite to the jack.
iv) The safe lateral load on the pile shall be taken as the least of the following:
a) 50% of the final load at which the total displacement increases to 12mm
b) Final load at which the total displacement corresponds to 5mm
v) Routine lateral test shall be carried out for a test load equal to the working load; the maximum deflection of test
loading in position shall not exceed 5 mm.

C) Pullout Test:

30   

 
 
 

i) Pullout test shall be carried out preferably on initial test piles.


ii) Uplift force shall be applied by means of hydraulic jacks with gauge using a suitable pullout setup.
iii) Displacement measurement shall be made at pile top with atleast two dial gauges placed at diametric opposite on
piles.
iv) The pullout load increment and consequent displacement readings shall be read as in the case of vertical load test.
v) The safe uplift load shall be taken as the least of the following:

1. For piles upto and including 600mm diameter


i) 2/3 of the load at which the total displacement is 12mm.
ii) Half of the load at which the load displacement curve shows a downward trend

2. For piles above 600mm diameter


i) 2/3 of the load at which the total displacement is 18mm or maximum of 2% of pile diameter whichever is less.
ii) Half of the load at which the load displacement curve shows a downward trend

iv) The initial test shall be carried out up to 2.5 times the estimated safe uplift load or until the load displacement
curve show the downward trend.
v) Routine test shall be carried out to 1½ times the working load or 12mm total displacement for piles diameter up to
and including 600mm and 18mm or maximum of 2% of pile diameter whichever is less for piles of diameter more than
600mm, whichever is earlier.

Recording of data:
The pile test data will be recorded for the test under consideration and recorded in a tabular form along with the
information about the pile. The data will consist of load, displacement and time.

31   

 
 
 

Site Lab Test Procedures


Cement

Freshness Test:

 Choose any bag at random


 Check the printed manufacturing date for week, Month & Year
 Cement should not be more than 30 days old

Smoothing Test:

 Open the cement bag from one corner and take some dry cement in the finger and rub, feel the touch. It should
feel silky n smooth while rubbing.

Floating Test:

 Take a clean measuring jar


 Fill the jar with clean water
 Good Cement floats for a while and then sinks slowly to the bottom
 Any light weight impurities may remain floating even after cement sinks and if some heavier impurities are there,
they will start sinking immediately

Lump Test:

32   

 
 
 

 Take any cement bag at random and test it for presence of lump
 Good fresh cement should be in powder form only and lump formation must not be there
 Any cement bag with lumps should be rejected Steel

Hardness Test:

 Take 1m length of each diameter of bar from different lots by holding both ends of the bar in two hands apply
pressure for bending
 Observe the bend portion, bend should be smooth
 If steel ins not good then it may break of develop the crack on bending surface, such steel should be rejected

Weight Check Test:

 Take exact 1meter length of each diameter of bar on random basis


 Take weight of each sample on weighing scale.
 Then compare the weights with that of theoretical weights given.
 The difference in weight should not be more than 5%

Sand

Test for bulking Sand:


 Take 250ml glass cylinder
 Take damp sand and fill up to 200ml. mark
 Slowly pour some water so that the sand settles to its actual volume which is less than 200ml mark it, let’s say it
is D ml. Then bulkage is calculated by using formula

% Bulk age = 200-D X 100


D
 This bulking of sand should be known for proper correction to be applied while calculating dry sand requirement

SILT content of Dry Sand :

33   

 
 
 

 Take a clean measuring cylinder


 Take sand, add water above it & shake well
 Allow a period of 2 hours for settlement
 Clean sand will settle at the bottom with silt and clay impurity staying at the top of sand layer
 Take total reading of sand (Say the reading is X )
 Now observe the bottom level reading for sand (say it is Y ) then calculate the silt content % using below formula

% Silt Content = X-Y X 100


X
 Total SILT Content should not be more than 4% for good quality sand

Metal

Water Absorption Test:

 After unloading of metal, collect small quantity of metal from different parts of the heap
 Mix the different parts and take exact 2kg of metal in container

 Let it be submersed for 24 hours


 Then again weigh the wet metal, the weight will be more than 2kg. Note down difference in weight. Then calculate
the water absorption % using below formula :

% Absorption = Difference in Weight X 100


Original Weight
 For Concrete work good metal should not have water absorption more than 5%.

Red Bricks & Fly Ash Bricks

Water Absorption test:

34   

 
 
 

 Select 3nos. of Bricks / blocks of proper size and shape at random


 Take weight of each samples and note down (say W1,W2,W3) & take the average of these three bricks weight

Average (W) = W1+W2+W3


3
 Submerge the samples in water for 24 hours, take weight again of wet samples (Say W1’,W2’,W3’) & also the
average weight of all three wet samples
Average (W’) = W1’+W2’+W3’
3.
 Once the value W & W’ is arrived, calculate the water absorption % using below formula :
% Absorption = W’-W (Difference in weight) X 100
W (Original Weight)
 For good quality bricks this value should not be more than 20% for red bricks should not be more than 10% for fly
ash briks.

35   

 
 
 

SIEVE Analysis

SIEVE ANALYASIS
For coarse aggregate
Weight
Cumulative Weight Retained Cumulative % Cumulative %
I.S.SIEVE Retained
(kg) Retained Passing
(KG)
80mm W1 A=W1 A1=A/W*100 %=100-A1
63mm W2 B=A+W2 B1=B/W*100 % =100-B1
40mm W3 C=B+W3 C1=C/W*100 %=100-C1
25mm W4 D=C+W4 D1=D/W*100 %=100-D1
20mm W5 E=D+W5 E1=E/W*100 %=100-D1
16mm W6 F=E+W6 F1=F/W*100 %=100-E1
12.5mm W7 G=F+W7 G1=G/W*100 %=100-G1
10mm W8 H=G+W8 H1=H/W*100 %=100-H1
Total Weight
Total (P)= %=100-W1
(W)=

36   

 
 
 

 Take the weight of coarse aggregate which is used for sieve analysis (W)
 Pass it through I.S. recommended sieves and take the weight of retained aggregate at each sieve as W1,W2,W3….
Respectively
 Calculate the cumulative weight retained and note down in reading book by using the procedure as given in table
 Calculate the cumulative percentage retained using the procedure as given in table

 Calculate the cumulative percentage passing using the procedure as given in table.
 Note :- For fine aggregate calculate the fineness modulus by using the formula F.M.=P/100

Concrete Compressive Strength Test

Procedure :

 Weigh the concrete cube and note down the reading.


 Place the concrete cube of size 150mm X 150mm X 150mm in testing machine and fix it by revolving the upper
circular shaft.
 Make tight the bottom side knob and apply the load without interruptions using the lever handle until the red
gauge indicator in the gauge box stopped.
 Note down the indicator reading and calculate the compressive strength by suing the procedure :

Compressive strength = Gauge reading / Load applied area


Compressive Strength = Gauge Reading / 22.5 N / mm2

Precautions:-

 Remove the mold after 24 hours & submerge the concrete cube in clean & fresh water
 The water in which the cube are submerged shall be replaced every 7days
 Cubes shall not be allowed to dry out at any time before testing

37   

 
 
 

External Lab Test Procedures


(These tests are only for general information and not to be carried out at site)

38   

 
 
 

1.0 CEMENT

1.1 TEST PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF CONSISTENCY OF STANDARD CEMNT PAST.

1.1.1 PUROSE OF TESTING:


This test is done for determining the quantity of water required to produce a cement paste of standard consistency.

1.1.2 CODAL REFERANCE:


a) IS : 4031 : (Part-4) : Method of Physical testing for hydraulic cement, Determination of Consistency of standard
cement paste of hydraulic cement.
b) IS : 5513 : Specification of Vicat apparatus.

1.1.3 TEST EQUIPMENT:


a) Vicat Apparatus with plunger.
b) Graduated Jar to measure water.
c) Weight balance.
d) Trowel.

1.1.4 TEST PROCEDURE:


a) The Standard Consistency of a cement paste is defined as that consistency which will permit the vicat plunger
to penetrate to a point 5mm to 7mm from the bottom of the vicat mould.
b) Take 400gm Cement & add known amount of water to the weight of cement to make the standard cement
paste.
c) The time of gauging should not less than 3 minute & not more than5 minute, the time period from the time
adding water to the dry cement until commencing to fill the mould.
d) Place the test mould on a non-porous testing made of glass.

39   

 
 
 

e) After filling the mould place it on the base plate of the vicat apparatus with glass plate, for making it level with
the top of the mould.
f) Then slightly shake the mould to expel the air.
g) Now lower the plunger just near the top surface of the cement paste & realize quickly it to sink into the paste.
h) The above operation should be carried out immediately after filling the mould.
i) Continue the same process with the varying percentage of water in the range, until the desired limit is achieved.

1.1.5 RECORDS :

The result should be record in the relevant format.

1.1 DETERMINATION OF SETTING TIME OF CEMENT PASTE

1.2.1 PURPOSE OF TESTING :

This test is done for determining the initial and final setting time of cement of given consistency.

1.2.2 CODAL REFERANCE :


a) IS : 4031 : (Part-5) : Method of Physical testing for hydraulic cement, Determination of Initial and final setting
times.
b) IS : 5513 : Specification of Vicat apparatus.

1.2.3 TEST EQUIPMENTS :


a) Vicat apparatus with plunger.
b) Graduated Jar to measure water.
c) Weight balance.
d) Trowel.

1.2.4 TEST PROCEDURE:

a) Prepare a neat cement paste by gauging the cement with 0.85 times the water required to give a paste of
standard consistency. The paste shall be gauged for 3 to 5 minutes.

40   

 
 
 

b) Fill the mould completely and smooth off the surface of the paste making it level with the top of the mould.

DETERMINATION OF INITIAL SETTING TIME:

A) Place the test block under the vacate apparatus. Lower the needle gently until it comes in contact with the
surface of the test block and quickly release, allowing it to penetrate into the test block.

B) In the beginning, the needle will completely pierce the test block. Repeat this procedure until the needle, when
brought in contact with the test block and released as described above, fail to pierce the block beyond 5.0+
0.5mm measured from the bottom of the mould.

C) The period elapsing between the time when water is added to the cement and the time at which the needle fails
to pierce the test block to a point 5.0+ 0.5mm measured from the bottom of the mould shall be the initial
setting time.

DETERMINATION OF FINAL SETTING TIME:

a) Replace the initial setting needle of the Vicat apparatus by the final setting needle. The cement shall be
considered as finally set when, upon applying the needle gently to the surface of the test block, the needle
makes an impression thereon, while the attachment fails to do so.
b) The period elapsing between the time when water is added to the cement and the time at which the needle
makes an impression on the surface of test block while the attachment fails to do so shall be the final setting
tile.
c) The result of initial and final setting the shall be reported to the nearest five minutes.

1.2.5 RECORDS :

The result should be record in the relevant format.

1.3 DETERMINATION OF SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF CEMENT

1.3.1 PURPOSE OF TESTING:


This test is done for determining the specific gravity of cement.

41   

 
 
 

1.3.2 CODAL REFERANCE:


a) IS : 4031 : (Part-11) : Method of Physical testing for hydraulic cement, Determination of specific gravity of
Cement.

1.3.3 Test EQUIPMENTS:


a) Le- Chattelier flask.
b) Weight balance.
c) Kerosene oil.

1.3.4 TEST PROCEDURE :

a) Take a flask which shall be filled with kerosene to a point on the stem between the zero and the1-ml mark.
b) The inside of the flask above the level of the liquid shall be dried. The first reading shall be recorded.
c) A Weighed quantity of cement (about 65g for Portland cement ) shall then be introduced in small amounts at
the same temperature as the liquid.

d) Care shall be taken to avoid splashing and to see that the cement does not adhere to the inside of the flask
above the liquid.

e) After all the cement has been introduced, the stopper shall be placed in the flack and the flask rolled in an
inclined position of gently whirled in a horizontal circle, so as to free the cement from air until no further air
bubbles rise to the surface of the liquid.

f) If a proper amount of cement has been added, the level of the liquid will be in its final position at some point of
the upper series of graduations. The final reading shall be taken.

g) The difference between the first and the final readings represents the volume of liquid displaced by the mass of
cement used in the test. The specific gravity shall be calculated as follows to the second place of decimal.

h) The specific gravity = Mass of cement in gms


Displaced volume in cm3

42   

 
 
 

1.3.5 RECORDS:
The result should be record in the relevant format.
.
1.4 TEST PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF FINENESS OF CEMENT BY DRY SIEVING
1.4.1 PURPOSE OF TESTING :
This test is done for determining the fineness of cement in %.

1.4.2 CODAL REFERANCE :


a) IS : 4031, part-1 Method of physical test for hydraulic cements, determination of fineness of cement by Dry
sieving method.

1.43 TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY :


The temperature of the gauging room, dry materials & water should be maintained at 27+20 C.

1.4.4 TEST EQUIPMENTS :


a) IS sieve no 9 (90micron).

1.4.5 TEST PROCEDURE :


a) Take 100 gm (A) of cement sample in a 90-micron sieve.
b) Then sieve it properly by shacking in all the specified direction for period of 2 minute.
c) Weight the residue left on the sieve (B)

1.4.6 CACULATIONS :
Fineness of the cement F= B X100 (%)
A
1.4.6 RECORDS:
The result should be record in the relevant format.
.
2.0 TEST PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF DRY DENSITY OF FINE, MEDIUM & COARESE GRAINED
SOILS BY SAND REPLACEMENT METHOD

2.1 PURPOSE OF TESTING:

43   

 
 
 

This test is done for determining of the dry density (in g/cm3) of fine, medium & coarse- grained soils by sand
replacement method.

2.2 CODAL REFERANCE :


a) IS : 2720 Part 2 Method for sampling soil.
b) IS : 2720 Part-XXVIII Determination of dry density of soil in place by core- cutter method.

2.3 TEST EQUIPMENTS:


a) Large sand pouring cylinder, conforming toIS: 2720 Part-XXVIII.
b) Tools for excavating holes.
c) Cylinder calibrating container.
d) Wt balance.
e) Metals containers.
f) Metal tray of 450sq mm area & 50mm deep with a 200m dia hole center.
g) Uniformly graded natural sand passing 1.0mm sieve & retained on 600micron Is Sieve.

2.4 CALIBRATION OF APPARTUS:


a) First measure volume of the calibrating container (V) incc.
b) Measure the wt of Calibrating container.
c) Close the shutter of the container& pour the above described sand into the cone at the bottom of the
container.
d) Then remove the sand from the cone & take wt (W2).
e) Pour sand into the poring cylinder & take wt of both, sand+ pouring cylinder (W1).
f) Then place the cylinder on the known volume-calibrating container & open the shutter to allow to run out the
sand into the cylinder.
g) After fully pouring the container close the shutter & remove it carefully.
h) Then take wt of the cylinder & sand after pouring (W3).
i) So buld density of sand Bds + (Wa/V) X 1000kg/cum.

2.5 PROCEDURE OF SAMPLING:


a) Choose a flat & level area approximately 60 cm2, at the place where the soil is to be tested.
b) Then the metal tray with central hole place on the prepare surface.

44   

 
 
 

c) Then excavate a hole using the hole on the tray as the pattern, to the depth of the layer to be tested up
to a maximum of 250mm.
d) Collect carefully the soil sample from the hole & keep the soil sample in a poly pack for further moisture testing.
e) Remove the metals tray & place the pouring cylinder just over the excavated hole.
f) First Pour a known wt of sand into the cylinder & measure the wt of sand & cylinder before pouring.
g) Then open the shutter & allow to running out the sand into the hole.
h) Close the shutter when no further movement of sand takes place.
i) Continue this process at least twice more.
2.6 TEST PROCEDURE:
a) First weight the soil sample collects from the hole (Ww).
b) Measure the wt sand+ cylinder after pouring.
c) Check the moisture content (Wm) by thermostatically hot air oven.

2.7 CALCULATIONS :
a) Weight of wet soil from the hole (Ww), in gm.
b) Weight of sand (+ cylinder) before pouring (W1), in gm.
c) Weight of sand (+cylinder) after poring (W4), in gm.
d) Weight of sand in hole (Ws) =W1-W4-W2, in gm.
e) Bulk density Bd= (Ww/Ws) X Bds, in kg/m3
f) Water content container No.
g) Weight of soil for water content determination (Wa), in gm.
h) Weight of oven dried soil (Wb), in gm.
i) Water content w = Wa – Wb X 100 (%)
Wa
j) Water content w = 100Bd kg/cum
100+w
2.8 RECORDS:
The result should be record in the relevant format.

3.0 TEST PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF DRY DENSITY OF SOIL BY CORE CUTTER METHOD

3.1 PURPOSE OF TESTING:


This test is done for determining the dry density of soil by core cutter method.

45   

 
 
 

3.2 CODAL REFERANCE:


a) S: 2720 Part 2 Method for sampling soil.
b) IS : 2720 Part- XXIX Determination of dry density of soil in place by core- cutter method.

3.3 TEST EQUIPMENTS:

a) Cylinder core cutter: Seamless steel tube of 130mm long, 100mm internal dia & 3mm thick with bottom end open
& cutting edge at bottom.
b) Steel dolly: 25mm high, 100mm dia & 10cm thickness
c) Steel rammer: 140mm dia & 75mm height base connected with 900mm length stuff of having dia 25mm, weight
of these whole arrangement approx 9kg.
d) Weight balance accurate to 1 gm.
e) Hot air oven accurate to 10 C / moisture meter to check the moisture content of the sample.
f) One non-absorbent tray.
g) Steel rule for remove sample from the core..
h) Steel straight edge.

3.4 CALIBRATION OF CORE:


a) Check the dimention of the core.
b) Measure the volume of core.
c) Measure the weight of empty core(We).

3.5 TEST PROCEDURE:


a) Select the place first, where the compaction of soil layer is to be tested.
b) Place the core cutter along with dolly on the selected soil layer & penetrate it by ramming with the rammer.
c) Take three samples for a particular layer.
d) Then the cutter is dug out from the soil test area.
e) Remove carefully the extra soil on both face of the core cutter by using the steel straight edge.
f) Weight the core-cutter with soil sample ( Ws).
g) Then remove the soil sample carefully & keep on a tray.
h) Check the moisture content (Wm) either by moisture meter or by thermostatically hot air oven.

46   

 
 
 

3.6 CALCULATIONS:
The bulk density is calculated as Bd = Ws-Wc in g/cm3
Vc
The dry density is calculated as Db = 100-Bd in g/cm3
Vc

Where,
Ws= weight of core –cutter + soil in gm.
Wc= weight of empty core-cutter
Vc= volume of empty core

3.7 RECORDS:
The result should be record in the relevant format.

4.0 Procedure for material Testing of concrete Ingredient- aggregate (Coarse & Fine)

4.1 PURPOSE:
This procedure covers the test method for the determination of Physical & Mechanical Properties of fine & coarse of
Normal.

4.2 APPLCABLE STANDARDS & DOCUMENTS:

Is 383:1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
IS 460 Part 1 : 1985 Specification for Test Sieves : Part 1- Wire Cloth Test Sieves

IS 460 Part 2 : 1985 Specification for Test Sieves : Part 2 – Perforated Plate test Sieves

IS 460 Part 3 : 1985 Specification for Test Sieves : Part 3 – Methods of Examination of Apertures of
Test Sieves
IS 2386 Part 1 : 1963 Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete – Part I : Particle Size and Shape.

47   

 
 
 

IS 2386 Part 3 : 1963 Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete – Part 3 Specific gravity, density,
voids, absorption and bulking.
IS 2386 Part 4 : 1963 Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete – Part 4 Mechanical properties

IS 2430 : 1986 Methods for Sampling of Aggregates for Concrete

4.3 TEST EQUIPMENTS:

a) Sieve: Sieves conforming to IS 460 shall be used for determining particle size distribution. Following sieves
shall be taken for determining the grading of coarse and fine aggregates.
b) Balance: A balance accurate to 0.1 % of the weight of the sample to the taken shall be used.
c) Oven: A well ventilated oven thermostatically controlled to maintain temperature of 100 to 1100 C.
d) Basket: A wire basket of not more than 6.3 mm mesh or a perforated container of convenient size, preferably
chromium plated and polished, with wire hangers not thicker than one millimeter for suspending it from the
balance.
e) Metal Gauge: The length gauge confirming to IS 2386 Part 1 shall be used as shown in figure. The tolerance
on dimensions shall be + 0.20 mm for dimensions shall equal to or more than 50mm and + 0.10 mm for
dimensions less than 50mm.
f) Impact testing machine: as per IS specifications.
g) Tamping Rod: A straight metal Tamping rod of circular cross-section 10mm in diameter and 230 mm long.
Rounded at one end.
h) Cylinder Cell: Open ended 150 mm cylindrical cell with appropriate base plate and plunger, metal measure
and tamping rod.
i) Compression Testing Machine: Compression testing machine capable of applying a load of 40 Tones is not
more than 10 minutes at a uniform rate of loading.

48   

 
GUIDANCE
DOCUMENT
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD
(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

Guidelines to start construction work


during Pandemic Situation (Covid-19)

Prepared by

Mr.xxxxx – HSE Specialist


Guidance Document
Reviewed & Approved by HSE/GID/001
Rev 00
Mr. XXXXX- Site Incharge Issued on: 09/11/2020
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

Document Issue / Revision Log

Reviewed &
Date Rev Description of Change Prepared by
Approved by

Rev Mr. XXXXX Mr. XXXXX


09/11/2020 New Issue
00 HSE Specialist Site Incharge

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 2 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

Table of Contents

1. Introduction … 4
2. Scope … 5
3. Responsibilities … 6
4. Preparedness – Prior to start of activity … 7
4.1 Communication … 7
4.2 Area Disinfection … 8
4.3 Safety Inspection of Machineries & Critical equipment … 9
4.4 Inspection of Facilities … 9
4.5 Basic screening & orientation of workmen before engaging … 9
5 Initiating/ Resumption of Normal Working … 10
5.1 Identification of Hazards, Risk Classification & control measures … 10
6 Reporting … 11
7 General Precautionary Measures … 11
8 Returning or New worker & staff joining to the project … 12
8.1 Procedure for Recruiting New Staff/ Workers … 12
8.2 Procedure for Returning existing staff/ workers … 12
9 Actions to be taken COVID-19 Positive case if identified … 13
10 Annexures … 12

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 3 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

1. Introduction

1.1 This Guideline is prepared to carry out the construction activities at Construction
of New Technology Centre at Vallam-Vadagal, Sriperumbudur, Tamil Nadu after
the lockdown period due to COVID-19 outbreak, 2020.

“By following this Guideline, the chain of corona spread shall be


effectively broken, and normal activities can be resumed safely”

1.2 All precautionary measures need to be ensured at TCSP establishments so that all
stakeholders e.g. Employees / Vendors / Suppliers / Customers / Contract
workers / Consultants / Visitors etc. feel safe and secure at workplace.

1.3 Disclaimer: This document is intended to facilitate safe startup and continuation
of construction works during COVID-19 pandemic situation. Any of the
recommendations contradicting with the existing / future notifications of the
Government / Local authorities shall be considered void. All concerned are
advised to consider that the instructions from the Government, will supersede any
/ all the guidelines mentioned in this document.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 4 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

2. Scope
This Guideline applies to the following activities / facilities of TCSP Project

 All activity involved on Construction of New Technology Centre at Vallam -

Vadagal, Sriperumbudur, Tamil Nadu.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 5 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

3. Responsibilities

3.1 The implementation of this SOP is the responsibility of


respective EPI Site Incharge & HSE Specialist.

3.2 Client/ Owner shall monitor the implementation, report


inadequacies and facilitate compliance to this Guidance
Document.

3.3 Client/ Owner shall facilitate necessary approvals / permissions


from government and local authorities to carry out the works.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 6 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

4. Preparedness – Prior to Start of Activity


4.1 Communication

 Communication for obtaining necessary permissions from respective


regulatory bodies for carrying out construction activities to be made on
time.
 Communication to all relevant external stakeholders (customers, vendors &
suppliers) on resumption and detailing the terms of resumed operations.
 Communication to internal stakeholders (employees) on resumption of
Operations and workforce deployment plans of respective departments.
 Display of information at all entrances, workplaces and common spaces for
protection and prevention awareness – social distancing and other
precautionary measures as per mandated guidelines.
 Advisories issued by Management from time to time to be widely circulated
& communicated to all employees.
 Containment zones if any identified shall be communicated to concerned
contractors and no works shall commence in those areas.
 Compliance audits of adherence to the advisories on preventive steps taken
to be done on regular basis by the Safety team.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 7 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

4.2 Area Disinfection


4.2.1 All areas in the premises including (but not limited to) the following shall be
disinfected completely with the use of approved disinfectant mediums.
(Refer Annexure 1 – Cleaning & Disinfection Guidelines etc.)
 Entrance of Site, Building, Office etc.
 Meeting rooms, Conference halls, Canteens, Rest Rooms, Pantries
 Open areas-Staircases, Parking Areas
 Lobbies
 Equipment having high touch surfaces like -Lifts/Elevators and their
buttons, Panel rooms, Buses, Company Vehicles especially commonly
used vehicles, Shuttle buses
 Washrooms, Toilets, Sink etc.
 Walls of common places
 All other surfaces like hand railings, Office Tables etc...,
 Parking Facilities
 Guest Houses

4.2.2 Appropriate protective equipment like Face Masks, Goggles, Gloves, Aprons,
Shoes including appropriate disinfecting equipment like sprayer, brush,
sanitizer, soaps etc. shall be made available in adequate quantities, in addition
to Disinfection Chambers / areas at all identified places.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 8 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

4.3 Safety Inspection of Machineries & Critical equipment

4.3.1 As all the major & Critical equipment like Pilling machine, excavator, Crane,
transportation vehicle, bar bending machine, concrete pump, Associated tools
and tackles, suspended work platforms, man-lifters etc., shall be disinfected to
prior to start of daily activity at worksite.

4.4 Inspection of Facilities


The workmen welfare facilities including Labour accommodations, Rest areas,
Toilet facilities, drinking water facilities shall be inspected for adequate
precautions especially from Hygiene and social distancing point of view, by the
Contractor as well as by the Client/ Owner to ensure their adequacy.

4.5 Basic screening & orientation to workmen before engaging


All the workmen shall be sensitized on the hygiene and other work requirements
like social distancing before being engaged for the work.
Body temperature shall be monitored by infrared thermometer before being
engaged for the work
Work area shall be displayed with COVID-19 symptoms, Do’s & Don’t issued by
local authorities.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 9 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

5. Initiating/ Resumption of Normal Working


5.1 Identification of Hazards, Risk Classification & Control
Measures
Work area / Activity is considered as per the requirement of the project and the risk
is classified as High and Low according to the expected workmen density in those
identified areas. The areas are identified through brainstorming sessions with
concerned personnel and are dynamic in nature. Refer the tabulations below for
listing of High and Low risk activities / work areas.
High Risk Low Risk
(Work area / activity where people (Work area / activity where people
working in high concentration / possibility working in low concentration / less
of close contact) possibility of close contact)
Transportation of workmen to work area & Bar Bending area
back
Labour Accommodation Concreting area
Main Entrance Surveying
Stores / Yard – Issue of Materials Lifting operation
Staff / Workmen Rest Areas Site Security
Occupational Health Center / First Aid QA/QC Lab
Rooms
Meeting Rooms / Conference Halls Project / Site Offices
The risk level may increase or decrease according to the site requirements and shall
be reflected in the Risk assessment document. (Annexure 2)
All necessary control measures need to be taken prior to work resumption and
recorded on Work Start checklist (Refer Annexure 3).

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 10 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

6. Reporting
The following reports must be submitted by the contractors on daily basis to
Client/ Owner who will further scrutinize, compile and forward to local
authorities (if required).
1. Emergency Preparedness & Response report (Annexure 4)
2. Photographic evidence of containment and welfare initiatives with location,

date and time.

7. General Precautionary measures


 Ensure Social Distancing by Restriction in gathering of 5 or more in workplaces
and public places. Large meeting to be prohibited and large gathering of more
than 10 people in workplaces is discouraged. Seating arrangement shall be at
least 6 feet from each other.
 Wearing face-cover/musk at public places & workplaces
 Spitting in workplaces / public places shall be punishable with fine
 Ban on liquor, Gutka and tobacco in workplaces
 Temperature screening during entry and exit to be done.
 Sanitizers and hand wash facility shall be made available at convenient places
at worksites
 Staggered lunch breaks to ensure social distancing
 Persons above 65 years, persons with co-morbidities, parents of children below
the age of 5 should be encouraged to work from home
 Daily Sanitize/disinfect the workplace
 Vehicles with 30-40% passenger capacity
 2/4 (depending on the size) will be allowed to travel in lifts/hoists
 Restrict / Ban non -essential visitors
 List of authorized hospitals/clinics nearby areas to treat COVID 19 to be
maintained

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 11 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

8. Returning or New worker & staff joining to the


project
8.1 Procedure for recruiting new staff/ workers
New workmen brought from outside of city / state shall be subjected to special
screening in addition to the existing screening and safety induction.
1. All the new staff/ workers should be physically fit and medical examination
need to be completed.
2. Along with the regular induction process, Self-Declaration for new workmen/
staff during COVID-19 form need to be dully filled and signed (Annexure 5)
3. New staff/ workers should be kept on separate accommodation/ camp
minimum 14 days to avoid spreading of COVID-19 to the existing peoples.
4. Job/ task need to be assigned separately for the new staff/ workers minimum
14 days before putting them to regular duties with existing peoples.

8.2 Procedure for returning existing staff/ Workers


1. All the returning staff/ worker need to be undergo medical examination
2. Self-Declaration form need to be dully filled and signed (Annexure 6)
All the New and returning staff/ workmen details need to be reported by the
respective contractor to GC CRE/ Expert’s on daily basis.
Note: Please refer the (Annexure-7) Deployment of New/ Returning staff & worker to
project work for more clarification.

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 12 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

9. Action to be taken if COVID-19 positive case if


identified
 If any person identified COVID-19 positive, the respective staff/ workmen will
be admitted at COVID-19 recovery hospital as listed by Govt.
 If the COVID-19 identified person deployed/ worked at any construction, all
the work area will be disinfected immediately and left open for air
circulation/ ventilation for 2 days.
 If any person come in close contact with COVID-19 positive identified person
for last 2 days, all the close contact tracing will be initiated and listed person
will be kept under quarantined or assigned work from home for 7 days to
restrict spreading of COVID-19.
 If any person kept under quarantine or work from home observed any
symptoms of COVID-19, they will be diagnosed, if required they will be send
for recovery hospital as suggested by the doctor.
 No COVID-19 positive identified person will be deployed at work site until
they submit the COVID-19 Negative report or suggest by doctor in writing for
“Fit to Work”.
Note: Please refer the (Annexure-8) Flow Chart - Action to be taken if COVID-19
positive case identified at workplace for more clarification

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 13 of 14
FORMAT NO.
ENGINEERING PROJECT (INDIA) LIMITED HSE/GID/001
Guidance Document ISSUE NO. 01
REV NO. 00 , DATE: 09.11.2020

10. Annexures
Annexure-1: Guidelines for Cleaning and Disinfection etc.
Annexure-2: Risk Assessment
Annexure-3: Checks to Ensure Before Work Start
Annexure-4: Emergency Preparedness & Response
Annexure-5: Self-declaration for New Workmen/ Staff Joining During Covid-19
Outbreak
Annexure-6: Resumption of works Self-declaration form
Annexure-7: Flow Chart - For Deployment of New/ Returning staff & Worker to
project work
Annexure-8: Flow Chart – Action to be taken if any COVID-19 positive case
identified at Workplace/ Site office

Guidelines to start Construction work during Pandemic Situation (COVID-19)

Page 14 of 14
PORJECT ESHSE
MANAGEMENT
STRATEGIES &
IMPLANTATION PLAN
Rev.02
Date of Rev.: 08/11/2020

PREPARED BY
Mr. XXXXXX – Health & Safety Specialists

CHECKED BY
Mr. XXXXXX – Chief Engineer (or xxxxxxx)

APPROVED BY
Mr. XXXXXX – Project Director/ Project Manager
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

PROJECT ESHSE MANAGEMENT


STRATEGIES & IMPLEMENTATION PLAN

CLIENT :

CONSULTANT :

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 1 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Document Issue/ Revision Log


Date Rev Document of Change Prepared Checked by Approved
by by

02/06/2014 Rev.01 New Issue

08/11/2020 Rev.02 New Issue as per Client/


Owner requirement

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 2 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Table of Contents Page


1. SCOPE______________________________________________________________ 5
2. LEGAL & OTHER REFERENCES___________________________________________ 5
3. OUR POLICIES_______________________________________________________ 7
a. HEALTH & SAFETY POLICY__________________________________________________ 7
b. ENVIRONMENT POLICY____________________________________________________ 8
c. COMMUNITY RELATION POLICY_____________________________________________ 9
4. HSE PLAN IMPLEMENTATION__________________________________________ 10
5. SITE ORGANISATION__________________________________________________ 10
6. ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES___________________________________________ 11
7. ESHSE COMMITTEE___________________________________________________ 13
8. ID CARD AND FIRST DAY AT WORK, SHE ORIENTATION TRAINING_____________ 13
9. SHE TRAINING_______________________________________________________ 13
10. HSE INSPECTION_____________________________________________________ 14
11. ESHSE SUBMITTALS TO THE CLIENT/ OWNERS_____________________________ 15
12. ACCIDENT REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION______________________________ 17
13. EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS PLAN______________________________________ 17
13.1 Fire__________________________________________________________________ 17
13.2 Fall from Height________________________________________________________ 17
13.3 Electrocution__________________________________________________________ 18
13.4 Natural Disaster: Earthquake_____________________________________________ 19
13.5 Collapse of Ladder / Scaffolding___________________________________________ 19
13.6 Riot__________________________________________________________________ 20
13.7 Flood_________________________________________________________________ 20
13.8 Mock Drill_____________________________________________________________ 20
14. PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS__________________________________ 20
15. VISITORS TO SITE_____________________________________________________ 21
16. HSE MEASURES______________________________________________________ 21
16.1 House Keeping and Storage_______________________________________________ 21
16.2 Welding and Cutting____________________________________________________ 22
16.3 Machine/Equipment Guarding____________________________________________ 23
16.4 Hoisting and Rigging____________________________________________________ 23
16.5 Working at height______________________________________________________ 25
16.6 Slip, Trip and Fall Hazard_________________________________________________ 25
16.7 Site electricity and Hazards_______________________________________________ 26
16.8 Lighting______________________________________________________________ 28
16.9 Hand Tools and Power Tools______________________________________________ 29
16.10 Welding, Gouging and Cutting___________________________________________ 31
16.11 Fire Prevention, Protection and Fighting System_____________________________ 32
16.12 Excavation___________________________________________________________ 33
16.13 Work Permit System___________________________________________________ 34
16.14 Traffic Management___________________________________________________ 35
16.15 Manual Lifting And Carrying Of Excessive Weight____________________________ 40

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 3 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.16 Occupational Health And Welfare_________________________________________ 41


17. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT_______________________________________ 43
17.1 Air Quality____________________________________________________________ 43
17.2 Air Monitoring_________________________________________________________ 44
17.3 Water Quality__________________________________________________________ 45
17.4 Waste________________________________________________________________ 45
17.5 Energy Management____________________________________________________ 46
17.6 Noise_________________________________________________________________ 46
17.7 Noise Monitoring_______________________________________________________ 46
17.8 Vibration Level_________________________________________________________ 47
18. WATER RESOURCE PROTECTION____________________________________________ 48
18.1 Surface Water Source Protection Measures__________________________________ 48
18.2 Groundwater Source Protection Measures___________________________________ 48
18.3 A water point of any kind or source should be: _______________________________ 49
18.4 Set up Rules for all Community Members____________________________________ 49
19. HAZARD IDENTIFICATION, RISK ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL PROCEDURE_______ 49
19.1 Verification and Corrective Action__________________________________________ 51
20 APPENDIXES – SAFETY CHECKLIST/ FORMS___________________________________ 53
Accident / fire report________________________________________________________ 54
Supplementary accident & investigation report___________________________________ 55
Monthly health, safety & environment (HSE) report________________________________ 56
Monthly HSE checklist cum compliance report____________________________________ 57
Permit for working at height (above two meters) _________________________________ 62
Permit extension___________________________________________________________ 64
Safety inspection checklist construction site______________________________________ 65
Tool box talk meeting_______________________________________________________ 67
Safety check list for welding generator__________________________________________ 69
Safety check list for welding machine___________________________________________ 70
Safety check list for D.G set___________________________________________________ 71
Safety check list for portable grinding machine/tool_______________________________ 72
Safety check list for gas cutting set_____________________________________________ 73
Safety check list lifting tools & tackles___________________________________________ 74
Safety induction format –worker_______________________________________________ 75
Details of first aid box_______________________________________________________ 76
Contact during emergency___________________________________________________ 78
Checklist for scaffoldings____________________________________________________ 79
Daily safety checking sheet ______________________________________________ 82
Inspection of temporary electrical installation_________________________________ 84
Monthly workforce report________________________________________________ 85

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 4 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

1. SCOPE
This specification establishes the ESHSE Management Strategies & Implementation
requirement to be complied during construction activity.
This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgment needed to
design & implement an effective ESHSE system for construction activities Requirements
stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE Management given
in relevant Act(s)/legislations, General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Particular Conditions of
Contract (PCC) and Contract Forms.
2. LEGAL & OTHER REFERENCES
In order to facilitate the better understanding on the various provisions of the
Act and Rules, a tabulated information highlighting the Sections/Rules applicable to the
legislation and Indian statutory requirements listed below but not limiting to:
i. Workmen Liabilities
a. Workman Compensation Act 1923
b. Payment of Gratuity Act 1972
c. Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952
d. Maternity Benefit Act 1951
e. Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act 1970
f. Minimum Wage Act 1948
g. Payment of Wages Act 1936
h. Equal Remuneration Act 1979
i. Payment of Bonus Act 1965
j. Industrial Disputes act 1947
k. Industrial Employment (Standing Order) Act 1946
l. Trade Unions Act 1926
m. Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act 1986
n. Inter-State Migrant workmen’s (Regulation of Employment & Conditions of Service)
Act 1979
o. Weekly Holidays Act -1942
ii. Health & Safety
a. The Building and Other Construction works (Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Service) Act 1996 and the Cess Act of 1996
b. TN Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and
Conditions of Service) Rules
c. Indian Electricity Act 2003 and Rules 1956
d. Motor Vehicles Act as amended in 1994 and The Central Motor Vehicles Rules, 1989
e. The Motor Transport Workers Act 1961 & Rules
f. Indian Road Congress Code IRC: SP: 55-2001
g. The Petroleum Act, 1934 and Rules 1976
h. Gas Cylinder Rules, 2003
i. Indian Explosives Act, 1884, along with the Explosives substance Act 1908 and the
j. Explosives Rules 1983

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 5 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

k. Factories Act 1948


iii. Environmental Protection
a. The Water(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974,
b. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
c. The Environment(Protection) Act, 1986,
d. The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991,
e. The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
f. Notification on Control of Noise from Diesel Generator (DG) sets, 2002
g. Recycled Plastic Usage Rules, 1998
h. Notification, Central Ground Water Board, Act January 1997
i. The Manufacturing, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989
j. Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996
k. The Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling & Trans-boundary Movement) Rules,
2007
l. Relevant Rules / Guidelines regarding Preservation of Trees
m. Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules
n. Fly ash utilization notification, Sept 1999 as amended in August 2003
iv. Contractual Stipulations
a. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
b. Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
c. Contract Forms

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 6 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

3. OUR POLICIES
a. HEALTH & SAFETY POLICY

HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY

EPIL, we are committed to conducting business safely and continually improving


our policies and practices for the future. Our aim is to create a workplace culture
to integrate safety into all activities, every day. We strive to maintain our corporate
goal of an accident-free workplace and will continue our pursuit of excellence in
health and safety through the following practices;
Health and Safety Management
We will:
 Conduct our operations in a manner that protects the health and safety of our
employees, the public and the surrounding communities.
 Require employees from all levels of the organization to participate in our Health
and Safety Program and both individually and collectively take responsibility to work
safely.
 Provide our employees with the required job-related training and safety-related
education.
 Seek compliance with all applicable legal and regulatory requirements.
 Investigate incidents and accidents to determine root cause.
 Ensure contractors that work for the Company are committed to conducting all
business operations safely and in compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Continuous Improvement
We will:
 Employ regular audits to enhance successful accident prevention programs as well
as to identify, if possible, areas for further improvement.
 Implement measures to minimize or eliminate all identified hazards in the Company
and in all activities related to its operations.
 Maintain safety statistics for both employees and contractors to track improvement.
 Annually review the overall Health and Safety Program to ensure its on-going
effectiveness.
Communication
We will:
 Ensure all employees, whether contractors or employees, are aware of their right to
refuse work that they determine to be unsafe.
 Inform employees and contractors of potential safety hazards on a continual basis.
 Encourage all employees to report immediately and, where appropriate, remediate
any unsafe work conditions or activities.
 Openly communicate hazards and emergency response plans throughout EPIL
employees and to affected communities and other stakeholders.
 Conduct general safety meetings and job-specific safety meetings as required.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 7 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

b. ENVIRONMENT POLICY

ENVIRONMENT POLICY

At EPIL we are committed to protecting the environment in which we operate and


take pride in conducting our business in a safe and responsible manner. We
recognize and accept our responsibility to develop our resources with awareness
of the environmental, economic and social needs and expectations of
stakeholders. Our commitment is embodied in the following statement of EPIL’s
environmental policy;
Environmental Management
We will:
 Integrate environmental integrity, social equity and economic viability into our
business processes.
 Provide staff with the resources to make environmentally sound decisions.
 Improve energy efficiency
 Assess the potential environmental impacts of our activities and propose
mitigation, where appropriate.
 Conduct our operations in a manner intended to prevent pollution, conserve
resources and deal responsibly with all environmental issues.
 Protect the soils and surface waters by minimizing erosion and run-off in the
Company property.
 Ensure preparedness with an effective emergency response program.
Continuous Improvement
We will:
 Promote innovative thinking in the development and implementation of new
ideas relating to the environmental integrity.
 Measure our performance using comprehensive audits.
 Establish environmental targets and objectives to improve our performance .
Communication
We will:
 Respond to the concerns and views of client & subcontractors in a timely and
open fashion.
 Engage interested parties, when necessary, to discuss our business operations
and their relationship to affected communities and the environment.
 Provide clear and candid environmental information about the products, services
and operations provided by the Company to customers, employees, government
agencies and the public, as appropriate.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 8 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

c. COMMUNITY RELATION POLICY

COMMUNITY RELATION POLICY

EPIL, is committed to conducting business under the highest social performance


standards in a manner that respects the environment, culture and customs of the
communities within the area of direct influence of the project.
EPIL builds a legacy of trust by carrying out their activities with environmental and
social responsibility and by implementing development that are sustainable and
that consider a balance between the economic viability of the project and the needs
of the communities in the direct area of influence.
EPIL commitments are based on the following community relations principles:

 Conduct operations with high standards for personal integrity and ethical
behavior
 Respect the laws and regulations of the government with whom we work and
the beliefs and values of communities.
 Promote equal opportunity for employment regardless of gender.
 Provide a means for open exchange of information that is clear and relevant
among communities, leaders, affected parties and EPIL.
 Communicate expectations regarding community relations to all our employees
and contractors;
 Implement Corporate Social Responsibility programs that directly benefit the
local communities; and
 Routinely review the effectiveness of our community relations programs.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 9 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

4. HSE PLAN IMPLEMENTATION


EPI shall appoint safety personnel from our side who shall be the responsibility for
safety activities during execution of work as specified in the contract agreement. This shall
always match with the requirement of safety personnel in relation to number of workers
deployed at the project site as given below.
NO OF WORKERS DEPLOYED REQUIREMENT OF SAFETY PERSONNEL

50-499 1 Safety Officer


500-1000 1 Safety Officer & 1 Safety Supervisor
1001-2000 1 Safety Officer & 2 Safety Supervisors.
2001-5000 3 Safety Officers.
5001-10000 4 Safety Officers.
EPI shall also prepare safety assurance program and also prepare detailed HSE
Assurance plan in the form of matrix covering all aspects of HSE implementation.
This assurance plan shall be reviewed, approved by CLIENT/Owner indicating that
extent of frequency of checks to be carried out at various stages by supervisory personnel.
5. SITE ORGANISATION
EPI - Site In- charge leads all activities and is responsible for implementing and
ensuing CLIENT/ Owner HSE requirements and HSE plan at the site.
Site In-Charge delegates his authority concerning HSE control to his Safety Engineers so as to
effectively introduce safety philosophy into daily activity through workers.

Site In-
Charge
Mr. XXXX

Health & Safety


Specialist
Mr. xxxx

Safety Steward
Mr. XXXXX

Site Organization Chart

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 10 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

6. ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES


a. Responsibility of EPI – Site In-charge shall
 Has the prime responsibility for assuring that the health and safety are of an
adequate standard.
 Safety policy and safety targets to be established by him.
 Promote the setting up of safety plan, regulations and rules and of a safety training
plan, etc.
 Organize and preside over safety committee.
 Direct the safety officers and other supervisors in carrying out their duties and
responsibilities.
 Frequent visits to work operation for monitoring Health and Safety levels.
 Prepare safety targets, safety plan, safety rules & regulations and safety training
plan.
 Attend to all safety meetings of client /CLIENT Specification.
b. Responsibility of EPI – Health & Safety Specialist shall
 Coordinate the safety activities between the owner and Sub agencies/Suppliers
engaged for various works
 Review the safety procedure approved by CLIENT/Owner, advice and recommend
any corrective necessary.
 Conduct regular safety audits to ensure that the established safety plan
implemented in proper manner for construction work.
 Be familiar with State and Statutory Legislation and CLIENT/Owner site safety rules
and guidelines.
 Report to all incident, injury treatments & lost time record to PMC.
 Report to EPI Site in-charge/Senior Manager any concerns that exit regarding safety
performance on site.
 Report and investigates all near misses, incidents and accidents.
 Organize the periodic safety committee meeting.
 Ensures that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) complies with all standards, codes
and regulations as required by law.
 Ensures that safety equipment (incl. Fire-fighting equipment) is always ready for use,
monitors expiry dates and inspection requirements.
 Organizes health care and medical control on employees including contribution to
first aid and urgent medical care in case of work related injuries.
 Ensure that all HSE-related documents like instructions, procedures, inspection
forms and emergency plans are kept updated with the latest information.
 Analyses of all operation related risks and develop prevention measures.
Coordinates and monitors waste control, effluent water discharge, vapor emission
and ground water quality.
 Ensure tool box talk have been given to workers as per requirements from time to
time by site engineer.
 Prepare Monthly HSE reports and check list regularly and submit to client on date as
agreed.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 11 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Checking up keeping of tools, tackles, lifting machines.


 Carryout daily safety checks on use of PPE.
 Promoting safety consciousness at site.
 Implementation of welfare measures for workers & staff at work site.
 Daily safety inspection at construction site.
c. Responsibility of Sub agencies/Supplier Construction Manager / site in charge shall:
 Be responsible for all safety activities, including fire prevention during the
construction period.
 Submit a safety plan including safety measures for the work to the safety supervisor
prior to commencement of the work.
 Establish, implement and maintain the safety plan through the safety supervisor and
workers.
 Conduct independent audits to ensure conformance with the established safety plan
and determine the effectiveness of individual elements of the safety plan.
d. Responsibility of sub agency safety supervisor shall:
 Conduct daily safety tour and report to Safety officer.
 Conduct safety plan under the direction of the construction/Senior Manager.
 Patrolling the work site daily to verify that the work carried out under safe
conditions, with no violations of safety requirements.
 Advise promptly the construction supervisors and workers for corrective actions,
when any unsafe action or unsafe conditions or violations observed.
 Check each work procedure from the safety point of view and advise the
construction supervisors before commencement of work and or while working.
 Submit accident report to EPI safety officer and owners representatives.
 Maintain the published safety literature, safety regulations, codes and other
communications. Advise management of compliance and conditions requiring
attention.
 Make through analysis of the statistical data through inspection, delineate problem
area, and make recommendations for solutions.
 Check on the use of all types of personnel protective equipment, evaluate the
effectiveness and suggest improvements.
 Report all incidents, first aid and medical treatment to EPI H&S Specialist.
 Ensure and specify all requirements, corrective action plan and work procedures for
various activities.
e. Responsibility of sub agency Supervisor and Foreman Shall:
 Organize site to that the work carries out in accordance with the safety standards
required for the minimum risk to workers and property.
 Teach workers the Basic safety requirement at sites.
 Ensure and follow each worker has understood the safety requirement for the job
which he carried out.
 Conduct Tool Box talks regularly with the help of site safety supervisor
 Halt the work, if unsafe situation arise/observed.
 Know the safety requirements stipulated in the safety plan.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 12 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Give precise instruction to the workers as the requirement for correct work method.
 Coordinate with his worker’s to avoid any confusion about areas of responsibility.
 Make sure that suitable personnel protective equipment is available and in use
 Assure that new workers properly instructed precautions to taken before they are
allowed to start work.
 Report all safety defects, and /usage practices to Site In-charge and Safety
supervisor.
 Ensure for orientation and safety standards required & requirements for corrective
work methods.
7. ESHSE COMMITTEE
Site ESHSE Committee meeting shall be conducted at least once in a month with the
minimum members listed below:
ESHSE Committee Members Designation Site Designation

Chairman Site In-charge


Secretary HSE Specialist
Sub-Agencies/ Supplier Construction
Manager
Members sub agency safety supervisor
sub agency Supervisor and Foreman
Workers’ Representatives
Employers Representatives Client/ Owner Representatives
The Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared and sent to all members within 2
working days preferably by mail / fax followed by hardcopy.
ESHSE Committee meeting minutes shall also be displayed in the notice board for wider
publicity to all concerned.

8. ID CARD AND FIRST DAY AT WORK, SHE ORIENTATION TRAINING


All personnel working at the site receive an induction HSE training explaining the
nature of the work, the hazards that may be encountered during the site work and the
particular hazards attached to their own function within the operation.
9. SHE TRAINING
The behavior of people at all levels of the EPI is critical for SHE performance. We shall
organize quality HSE training to engage Managers, supervisors and other personnel in
behavioral change and improve safety performance.
We EPI shall analyses the training requirements for all the employees and initiate a training
program to demonstrate that all persons employed, including subcontractors, are suitably
qualified, competent and fit. This will include:
 Detailed Job descriptions for all personnel, to include their specific HSE
responsibilities
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 13 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Specification of qualifications, competency and training requirements for all


personnel system for assessing new hirers e.g. previous training
 A means of confirming that the system is effective
 A matrix and schedule of training requirements, covering general, task specific
and HSE related training, showing the training frequency and interval between
refresher courses
 Timely, competent delivery of training courses
We shall arrange behavioral-based training programs for all the executives to identify,
recognize and eliminate unsafe act and unsafe conditions.
The refresher-training programme to all employees shall be conducted once in six months.
On-the spot practical skill development training on height safety including scaffold safety,
crane safety, welding safety, electrical safety, and traffic safety for marshals shall also be
conducted to all foremen / workmen who were associated to the concerned jobs.
Every employee including workman shall take safety Oath daily without fail.
All vehicle drivers including heavy vehicle operators shall be trained on defensive driving at
training institute recognized by Tamil Nadu State Road Transport Corporation / Government
of Tamil Nadu, or any other driving institute registered under Motor Vehicles Act.
10. HSE INSPECTION
EPI shall evolve and administer a system of conducting HSE inspections and other risk
management analysis on a periodical basis.
The purpose of HSE inspection is to identify any variation in construction activities and
operations, machineries, plant and equipment and processes against the ESHSE Plan and its
supplementary procedures and programs.
Following HSE inspections program shall be adopted:
a. Planned General Inspection
Planned general inspections are performed at predetermined intervals and it usually
involves the representation from both EPI and the Client/ owners.
b. Routine Inspection
Routine inspections are often referring to the inspection of work site, equipment and
temporary structures performed by site and equipment operators and temporary
structure erectors.
c. Specific Inspection
Specific inspections are performed on activities without a predetermined date.
Competent supervisor usually perform inspections for ensuring an activity whether it is
executed in accordance to a general set of rules; method statement submitted or
developed procedures.
d. Other Inspection
Mandatory Inspections by Labor Department of Government.
Client/ Owner site/ HSE management team

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 14 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

11. ESHSE SUBMITTALS TO THE CLIENT/ OWNERS


EPI shall ensure that all ESHSE related documents are reported to Client/ Owner
regularly within the timeframe set by the client/ owner.
Metrics for regular reporting:
a. Environmental incidents or non-compliances with contract requirements, including
contamination, pollution or damage to ground or water supplies;
b. Health and safety incidents, accidents, injuries and all fatalities that require treatment;
c. Interactions with regulators: identify agency, dates, subjects, outcomes (report the
negative if none);
d. Status of all permits and agreements:
i. Work permits: number required, number received, actions taken for those not
received;
ii. Status of permits and consents:
e. Health and safety supervision:
i. Safety officer: number days worked, number of full inspections & partial
inspections, reports to construction/project management;
ii. Number of workers, work hours, metric of PPE use (percentage of workers with
full personal protection equipment (PPE), partial, etc.), worker violations observed
(by type of violation, PPE or otherwise), warnings given, repeat warnings given,
follow-up actions taken (if any);
f. Worker accommodations:
i. Date of last inspection, and highlights of inspection including status of
accommodations’ compliance with national and local law and good practice,
including sanitation, space, etc.;
ii. Actions taken to recommend/require improved conditions, or to improve
conditions.
g. HIV/AIDS: provider of health services, information and/or training, location of clinic,
number of non-safety disease or illness treatments and diagnoses (no names to be
provided);
h. Gender: number of female workers, percentage of workforce, gender issues raised and
dealt with (cross-reference grievances or other sections as needed);’
i. Training:
i. Number of new workers, number receiving induction training, dates of induction
training
ii. Number and dates of toolbox talks, number of workers receiving Occupational
Health and Safety (OHS), environmental and social training;
iii. Number and dates of HIV/AIDS sensitization and/or training, no. workers receiving
training (this reporting period and in the past); same questions for gender
sensitization, flag person training.
iv. Number and date of GBV /SEA sensitization and/or training, number of workers
receiving training on code of conduct (in the reporting period and in the past), etc.
j. Environmental and social supervision:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 15 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

i. Environmentalist: days worked, areas inspected and numbers of inspections of


each (road section, work camp, accommodations, quarries, borrow areas, spoil
areas, swamps, etc.), highlights of activities/findings (including violations of
environmental and/or social best practices, actions taken), reports to
environmental and/or social specialist/construction/site management;
ii. Sociologist: days worked, number of partial and full site inspections (by area: road
section, work camp, accommodations, quarries, borrow areas, spoil areas, clinic,
HIV/AIDS center, community centers, etc.), highlights of activities (including
violations of environmental and/or social requirements observed, actions taken),
reports to environmental and/or social specialist/construction/site management;
and
iii. Community liaison person(s): days worked (hours community center open),
number of people met, highlights of activities (issues raised, etc.), reports to
environmental and/or social specialist /construction/site management.
k. Grievances: list new grievances (e.g. allegations of GBV / SEA) received in the reporting
period and unresolved past grievances by date received, complainant, how received, to
whom referred to for action, resolution and date (if completed), data resolution reported
to complainant, any required follow-up(Cross-reference other sections as needed):
i. Worker grievances;
ii. Community grievances
l. Traffic and vehicles/equipment:
i. Traffic accidents involving project vehicles & equipment: provide date, location,
damage, cause, follow-up;
ii. Accidents involving non-project vehicles or boundary
iii. (also reported under immediate metrics): provide date, location, damage, cause,
follow-up;
iv. Overall condition of vehicles/equipment (subjective judgment by
v. Environmentalist); non-routine repairs and maintenance needed to improve
safety and/or environmental performance (to control smoke, etc.).
m. Environmental mitigations and issues (what has been done):
i. Dust: number of working bowsers, number of watering/day, number of
complaints, warnings given by environmentalist, actions taken to resolve;
highlights of quarry dust control (covers, sprays, operational status); % of
rock/spoil lorries with covers, actions taken for uncovered vehicles;
ii. Erosion control: controls implemented by location, status of water crossings,
environmentalist inspections and results, actions taken to resolve issues,
emergency repairs needed to control erosion/sedimentation;
iii. Quarries, borrow areas, spoil areas, asphalt plants, batch plants: identify major
activities undertaken in the reporting period at each, and highlights of
environmental and social protection: land clearing, boundary marking, topsoil
salvage, traffic management, decommissioning planning, decommissioning
implementation;

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 16 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

iv. Blasting: number of blasts (and locations), status of implementation of blasting


plan (including notices, evacuations, etc.), incidents of off-site damage or
complaints (cross-reference other sections as needed);
v. Spill cleanups, if any: material spilled, location, amount, actions taken, material
disposal (report all spills that result in water or soil contamination;
vi. Waste management: types and quantities generated and managed, including
amount taken offsite (and by whom) or reused/recycled/disposed on-site;
vii. Details of tree plantings and other mitigations required undertaken in the
reporting period;
viii. Details of water and swamp protection mitigations required undertaken in the
reporting period.
n. Compliance:
i. Compliance status for conditions of all relevant consents/permits, for the Work,
including quarries, etc.): statement of compliance or listing of issues and actions
taken (or to be taken) to reach compliance;
ii. Compliance status of C-ESMP/ESIP requirements: statement of compliance or
listing of issues and actions taken (or to be taken) to reach compliance
iii. Compliance status of GBV/SEA prevention and response action plan: statement of
compliance or listing of issues and actions taken (or to be taken) to reach
compliance
iv. Compliance status of Health and Safety Management Plan re: statement of
compliance or listing of issues and actions taken (or to be taken) to reach
compliance
v. Other unresolved issues from previous reporting periods related to environmental
and social: continued violations, continued failure of equipment, continued lack of
vehicle covers, spills not dealt with, continued compensation or blasting issues,
etc. Cross-reference other sections as needed.
12. ACCIDENT REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION
All accidents and dangerous occurrences shall immediately be informed verbally to the
Client/ Owner. This will enable the Client/ Owner to reach to the scene of accident /
dangerous occurrences to monitor / assist any rescue work and/or start conducting the
investigation process so that the evidences are not lost.

Reports of all accidents (fatal / injury) and dangerous occurrences shall also be sent within 24
hours as per approved format.
No accident / dangerous occurrences is exempted from reporting to the Client/ Owner.
13. EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS PLAN
An Emergency Response Plan for all work sites as required under Rule 36 of BOCWR will
be submitted as part of HSE plan.
Arrangements will be made for emergency medical treatment and evacuation of the victim in
the event of an accident or dangerous incident occurring, the chain of command and the

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 17 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

responsible persons with the telephone numbers and addresses for quick communication will
be adequately publicized and conspicuously displayed in the workplace.
13.1 Fire
 Shout for help.
 Turn off the electricity to the building from the mains.
 Call the fire brigade. Inform them of the nature of fire (solid / Liquid / gas)
 And location of the accident with any prominent landmark.
 In the event of small fire, attempt to put off the fire with minor fire appliances, water,
sand or any other available facility.
 Call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition of the injured if any.
 Request for ambulance if needed and rush victims to the nearest hospital.
 Inform Site In-Charge and HSE Department at the earliest.
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
13.2 Fall from Height
 Shout for help
 Call the fire brigade. Inform them the nature and location of the accident with any
prominent landmark.
 In the event of a minor injury provide immediate first aid to the victim.
 In the event of a major injury do not move the victim, as there could be possibility of a
fracture or dislocation.
 Call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition of the injured if any.
 Request for ambulance if needed and rush victims to the nearest hospital.
 Inform Site In-Charge and HSE Department at the earliest.
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
13.3 Electrocution
 Stay away the victim. Do not touch the person or anything he is holding with bare hands,
since there is every possibility that the person any still be in touch with the source of
electricity. Touch the victim if you have to with a wooden rod or with gloves on.
 Remove plug of the connected electrical equipment from socket.
 Turn off the electricity to the building from the mains.
 Shout for help and do not let anyone to get close to the victim.
 Do not give anything to the victim to eat or drink.
 Loosen clothes and start artificial respiration if necessary.
 Call the fire brigade. Inform them the nature and location of the accident with any
prominent landmark.
 Call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition of the injured if any.
 Request for ambulance if needed and rush victims to the nearest hospital.
 Do not permit use of water at the site under any circumstances.
 Don’t touch burns, burst blisters or remove burnt clothing.
 Inform Site In-Charge and HSE department at the earliest
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 18 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

13.4 Natural Disaster: Earthquake


 Turn off the electricity to the building from the mains.
 Sound siren / whistle to alert personnel.
 Shout for help and direct all personnel to assemble outside in an open area, far from any
high-rise building.
 If people are trapped inside, shout out to them to be calm and that help is in mind. Ask
them to stand under the beams of buildings and to move away from under the doors /
furniture.
 Attempt to evacuate people with disabilities first.
 In the event of major collapse, do not attempt to enter the building until it has been
declared safe to do so by the District authorities.
 When entering the collapse building always keep a person as a look out, to alert you in
the event of an emergency.
 Attempt to rescue any person trapped inside the collapsed building, by going inside with
a rope tied to your waist.
 In the event of any injury to any person try to immediately remove him / her from the
place where there is a chance of further collapse, with the least bit of movement and
discomfort to the victim, but with maximum speed.
 Call the fire brigade. Inform them the nature and location of the accident with any prominent
landmark.
 Call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition of the injured if any.
 In the event of a minor injury provide immediate first aid to the victim.
 Inform Site In-Charge and HSE Department at the earliest.
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
13.5 Collapse of Ladder / Scaffolding
 Shout for help.
 Move the victim to a safe place away from the collapsed structure. Remember a collapsed
structure is a weak structure.
 In the event of a minor injury provide immediate first aid to the victim.
 In the event of a major injury do not move the victim, as there could be possibility of a
fracture or dislocation.
 Call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition of the injured if any.
 Request for ambulance if needed and rush victims to the nearest hospital.
Inform Project manager and Safety Department at the earliest.
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
 Every year, approximately 60 workers die by falling from scaffolding; one out of five
construction site falls are fatal. The most potential risk of scaffolding is due to moving
scaffold components; scaffold failure related to damage to its components; loss of the
load; being struck by suspended materials; electrical shock; and improper set-up.
Construction workers who assemble and dismantle scaffolding and work platform at
construction sites face the risk of serious injuries due to falls. The scaffolding hazard is

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 19 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

addressed by started OSHA standards. They give specific requirements for the maximum
load, when to use scaffolding, bracing and the use of guardrails.
13.6 Riot
 Riots
 Sound siren / blow whistle and assemble all personnel at a safe place within the site
premises.
 Inform all personnel about the situation and appeal for calm.
 Address the personnel on the need for applying self-restraint.
 In the event of any unforeseen event at the work site, segregate warring groups and
appeal for self-restraint.
 Call the nearest police station / PCR if the situation goes out of hand.
 Provide first aid to the injured if any.
 In the event of any major injury call the nearest hospital and inform them of the condition
of the injured if any.
 Request for ambulance if needed and rush victims to the nearest hospital.
 Inform Site In-Charge and HSE Department at the earliest.
 Provide all help to the District authorities.
13.7 Flood
 If Flood Surrounded in work area immediately you should move to elevated place and
 Inform to Client/ Owner
 Inform to the National disaster Management Team
13.8 Mock Drill
 Will follow and participate in the main contractor’s mock drill at site by all the employees
and subcontractors.
 Mock drill on different scenario have been conducted and made aware to the workers
 After each mock drill the lesson learnt is informed among the project team.
 Effectiveness and response of everyone is monitored.
14. PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS
Following PPEs will be provided to workmen to protect against safety and health hazards.
Safety Purpose of
Item Location Compliance
Equipment Use
PN501
1 Safety Helmet In construction sites. Head protection
EN 397

Safety Shoes (with Steel Toe


2 In construction sites Foot protection
ankle protection) EN ISO 20345

High Visibility Clothing Identification in Reflector Safe


3 At low light area only.
(waist coat/jacket) dark EN 471

Type: -PN352
Full Body Wear at sites when Personal Fall
4 EN355:2002
Harness working in heights or Protection
EN361:2002

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 20 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

inside scaffolding or
any
Works which may
have the potential of
falling. (above 1.8mts
or where
more than 300 mm
gap)
Wear at sites during
welding, grinding,
drilling,
hammering works or
5 Goggles Eye protection Local
any
works which may
cause
injury to eyes
Wear at sites when
handling material with
6 Gloves Hand Protection Local
sharp edges or
chemicals
Wear at sites in dusty Respiratory
7 Dust mask PS400S
environment Protection
Wear at sites when
working in noisy
location
particularly at
atmosphere
with high frequency
8 Ear Plugs Noise Protection EP01 & EP02
noise
level (exceeding 85
dB)
such as grinding
works,
hammering

15. VISITORS TO SITE


 No visitor will be allowed to enter the site without the permission of the Client/ Owner.
 Visitors will be provided with Safety Helmet and other PPEs.
 All visitors will be accompanied by a responsible member of the site personnel.
 All the visitor must record their personal details in the entry register at gates.
 All the visitor must wear mandatory PPE issued by EPI and before entering the work site.
16. HSE MEASURES
16.1 House Keeping and Storage
 Housekeeping does not merely mean cleanliness. It is based on concept “Everything in
its proper place and Place for everything”.
 A good housekeeping is vital for safe operations. It can prevent many accidents normally
caused by slipping, tripping or falling etc.
 Housekeeping nothing but
Finding things that are not right and correcting it.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 21 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Hazard spotting
Protect from hazards
 A planned system of housekeeping will cover every feature of the workplace.
 Points to be checked to ensure good housekeeping in the work environment.
 Maintain the walkways and stairways clear of materials. This will help to prevent
accidents due to slip, trip and falls.
 Keep walkways and stairways free from electrical cables and wires.
 Keep tools and equipment away from walkways and in locations where there is no
chance of fall from height.
 Keep the materials and tools in storeroom. Have only tools that are essential for work
with you.
 Store combustible and flammable materials away from ignition source.
 Ensure adequate lighting and ventilation in working environment.
 Maintain cleanliness and orderliness in the working environment.
 Water stagnation should be avoided by providing proper draining system in the working
environment.
 Assign place of storage for all equipment.
 Keep the material after use in its place. Do not misplace it.
 Stack the materials in an orderly way.
 Floor openings should be properly covered.
 Cable trenches should always be covered.
 Remove trash, dirt and junk materials from the work area.
 Keep waste or dust bins in the work area and put the wastes in that bin only.
 Do not store materials or tools on window ledges.
 Do not keep lifting tackles on floors. Provide proper stands to hang them.
 Fire can be prevented by proper storage or disposal of flammable liquids, paper trash’s
and rags.
 Eliminate the practice of keeping excessive materials.
 Do not allow exits to be blocked.
 Keep all electrical control boxes free from stored items.
 The following steps have been identified and will be taken for proper housekeeping
during the execution of the Project.
 All workers and site supervisors will be trained and instructed to keep the area clean by
removing the unwanted / dangerous materials out from the workplace.
 Waste bins will be provided in sites in the area of work and daily disposal regime will be
established and implemented.
 The Site Engineers will inspect the site for Housekeeping.
 There will be signage provided in the area to keep workers aware of the importance.
16.2 Welding and Cutting
 Gas Cylinders used should be in upright position and handled only with trolleys.
 All gas cylinders shall be fixed with pressure regulator and dial gauges.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 22 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 DCP or CO2 type Fire Extinguisher not less than 5 kg shall be fixed at or near to welding
process zone in an easily accessible location. Fire Extinguisher should confirm to IS 2190:
1992.
 Welding grounds and returns should be securely attached to the work by cable lugs, by
clamps in the case of stranded conductors, or by bolts for strip conductors. The ground
cable will not be attached to equipment or existing installations or apparatus.
 Avoid being in contact with water or wet floors when welding. Use duckboards or rubber
protection
16.3 Machine/Equipment Guarding
 All potentially hazardous parts are required to be effectively guarded from accidental
or incidental contact. The following items, for example, are considered potentially
hazardous:
 Sheaves, pulleys and wire winders
 Chain/sprocket and slew ring and drives.
 Rollers and pulley drives
16.4 Hoisting and Rigging
 Rigging practices shall conform to the standards approved in the country of use. If no
rigging practices exist, they should be developed with the assistance of a licensed
professional engineer. Safe practices shall include but are not limited to the following:
 Machines/Hoisting devices (e.g. gasoline powered, electric winches, chain falls, etc.)
must be used and maintained in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
 Manufacturer recommended load capacities on rigging hardware (e.g. turnbuckles,
shackles, hooks, eyebolts, wire rope clips/clamps) - shall not be exceeded. Application
of these devices must be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations (e.g.
thimbles must be used in the eyes of all rope, slings shall not be shortened with knots
or other devices, slings shall be padded or protected from sharp edges or 90 degree or
greater bends).
 Wire rope clips shall not be used. If unforeseen circumstances require deviation from a
Standard Work Process, before wire rope clips can be used, a documented Risk
Assessment (RA) must be submitted for review and approval to the Client of the project.
Deviations can only use double saddle clips (or other approved mistake-proof
alternative), and they must be used and installed according to manufacturer’s
recommendations. Pre-formed slings are certified slings made by a specialized
manufacturer for hoisting applications that require no modification for use.
 Reeving must be done so that the hoisting strain comes on the centre of the blocks and
they are prevented from toppling, twisting and causing injury to the rope by cutting
across the edges of the reeve block.
16.4.1 Test and periodical examination of lifting appliances and gears
 All lifting appliances including all parts and gears thereof, whether fixed or movable shall
be thoroughly tested and examined by a competent person once at least in every six
months or after it has undergone any alterations or repairs liable to affect its strength

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 23 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

or stability. Within the validity, if the lifting appliances are shifted to a new site, re-
examination by the same competent person for ensuring its safety shall also be done.
 EPI will utilize the services of any competent person as defined in Factories Act, 1948
and approved by Chief Inspector of Factories with the permission of the Client/ Owner.
 All alarms and signals like automatic safe load indicators (SLI), boom angle indicators,
boom extension indicators, over lift boom alarm, swing alarm, hydraulic safety valves,
mechanical radius indicators, load moment indicators etc. shall be periodically
examined and maintained always in working condition
16.4.2 Automatic safe load indicators
 As stipulated in relevant Rule of BOCWR 2007, no lifting appliances gear or any other
material handling appliance is used, if:
 The Inspector having jurisdiction is not satisfied with reference to a certification of test
or examination or to an authenticated record maintain as provided under these rules;
 And in the view of such Inspector, the lifting appliance, lifting gear or any other material
handling appliance is not safe for use in building or other construction work;
 And no pulley block is used in building or other construction work unless the safe
working load and its identification are clearly marked on such block.
16.4.3 Qualification of operator of lifting appliances and of signaller etc.
 The Contractor shall not employ any person to drive or operate a lifting machine-like
crane, hydra etc. whether driven by mechanical power or otherwise or to give signals to
work as an operator of a rigger or derricks unless he:
 Is above twenty-one years of age and possesses a valid heavy transport vehicle driving
license as per Motor Vehicle Act and Rules.
 is absolutely competent and reliable
 Possesses the knowledge of the inherent risks involved in the operation of lifting
appliances by undergoing a formal training at any institution of national importance
acceptable to client.
 Is medically examined periodically as specified in Schedule VII of BOCW Rules
16.4.4 General
 Responsible personnel (i.e. mechanic-in-charge, lead person, foreman, etc.) will be
instructed regarding safety standards and proper application of all rigging and lifting
equipment.
 A system of communication (e.g. hand signals) must be established and used for all
hoisting/lifting operations.
 All rigging and lifting equipment (including hoists, ropes, hooks, etc.) shall be inspected
initially before the equipment is placed in service and at least once each year thereafter.
Inspections shall only be made by responsible personnel who are trained and
competent to perform such inspections. Written records of initial and periodic
inspections must be maintained, and the equipment must be marked to indicate the
last inspection date.
 All rigging and lifting equipment shall be visually inspected before each use for defects
and deformation. Defective devices shall be immediately removed from service
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 24 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 All personnel shall be kept clear of suspended loads.


 Tag lines or guides shall be used when loads are likely to swing or pass through a
restricted area.
 All new equipment must be designed to incorporate proper hoisting provisions, tools
and instructions.
 Hanging the Counterweight
 Two independent means of preventing the counterweight from falling must be used.
(E.g. two slings, two lifting devices or one of each).
 Each sling or lifting device shall have a load rating capable of supporting the
counterweight or the BMU components plus tools, equipment and employees involved
in the erection work activity.
16.5 Working at height
 Use Full body harness when working at heights where the worker is liable to fall over a
distance of more than 1.8 m from the level of working. Attach the lanyard of full body
harness to a stationary point.
 Tuck loose-fitting clothing and confine long hair. Remove all jewellery, ID cards and
loose tags that may get caught in moving equipment.
Check the quality of Scaffold daily before commencement of work. Ensure it is strong,
rigid, and free from shakes and other defects.
 Ensure availability of staircase or flat stepped ladder for safe access to machine room.
 Ensure availability of ladder for safe access into working platform.
 Check the quality of ladder and its rungs before using it.
 Planks used as Working platforms and its arrangements should be as per client
requirements
 Use only insulated / grounded Power tools.
 Check the condition of hand tools and power tools before commencement of work.
 Take protection against electrical hazards when using temporary wires for taking power
supply.
 Hand lamps used at site should have bulb guard and insulated holding arrangement.
 Use plug and socket arrangement while tapping power supply. Power supply should be
routed through ELCB.
 Do not carry tools in dress pockets while entering the shaft.
 Usage of working platform is insisted while working at height.
 Do not throw any material when working at height which may injure others.
16.6 Slip, Trip and Fall Hazard
As per Rule 42 of BOCWR:
 All places should be free from dust, debris or similar materials.
 Sharp projections or any protruding nails or similar objects shall be suitably guarded or
shall even be avoided to make the place safe to work.
 EPI will not allow workmen to work or use platforms, scaffolds/passageways or any
walkways, which has water, or oil or similar substances spilt and has a slipping hazard,

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 25 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

unless it is cleaned off or covered or sanded or saw dusted or make it safe with any
suitable material.
 When workers are exposed to areas where fall into water is possible, the Contractor
shall provide suitable and adequate equipment for saving the workers from drowning
and rescuing from such hazard. If the Client/ Owner considers, the Contractor shall
provide well-equipped boat or launch, manned with trained personnel at the workplace.
 Open side or opening where worker, equipment, vehicle or lifting appliance may fall at
a building or outside shall be guarded suitably except in places of free access by reasons
of nature of work.
 Suitable safety net shall be provided at places of material / man falling is possible in
accordance with national standards.
 The collapse of formwork in the construction industry has the potential for severe injury
and death. The four stages of the use of formwork (erection, adjustment, concrete
placement and dismantling) all need to be managed in a risk assessment framework.
Implementing suitable control measures can eliminate or reduce the potential for
events such as the collapse of formwork. Suitable control measures include:
 Keeping the documentation for the formwork at the workplace;
 Following the formwork documentation;
 Planning to ensure that all elements of the process are conducted in a safe manner
– e.g. ensuring operators such as crane operators, concrete placers are suitably
licensed and trained, appropriate personal protective equipment is used etc.
 Erecting the formwork on foundations which will support the loads to be imposed on
the formwork;
 Not erecting formwork near excavation;
 Ensuring materials used in the erection of formwork are not defective;
 Securing loose material which may be dislodged as a result of inclement weather;
 Inspecting the formwork assembly before and during the placement of concrete;
 Not attaching equipment to the formwork assembly unless specifically designed for
this purpose; and not using a stripping process which may cause damage to the
permanent structure.
16.7 Site electricity and Hazards
 Electricity in one of the greatest hazards to people either at work or at home. Power
line workers, electricians and electrical engineers work continuously and can face
exposure to this hazard on a daily basis. At the construction site, the best way to prevent
this kind of hazard is for the power line workers to be safe working to be safe working
distance away from the power lines. Other precautionary measures include guarding
and insulating of the vehicle from which they might work. This would help prevent
electrical hazards from injuring them while working.
 EPI have assess the size and location of the electrical loads and the manner in which
they vary with time during the currency of the project.
 They have elaborated as to how the total supply is to be obtained / generated. The
details of the source of electricity, earthing requirement, substation / panel boards,

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 26 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

distribution system shall be prepared and necessary approval from client obtained
before proceeding of the execution of the job.
 EPI will submit electrical single line diagram, schematic diagram and the details of the
equipment for all temporary electrical installation and these diagrams together with
temporary electrical equipment have submitted to the client and necessary approval
have been obtained.
 EPI will provided distribution system for control and distribution of electricity from a
main AC supply of 50Hz for typical appliances:
Fixed plant - 400V 3 phase
Movable plant fed via trailing cable over 3.75 kW- 400V 3 phase
Installation in site building - 230V Single Phase
Fixed flood lighting - 230V single phase
Portable and hand tools - 115V single phase
Site lighting - 115V single phase
Portable hand lamps - 115V single phase
 Enough ELCBs (maintain sensitivity 30 mA) / RCCBs for all the equipments (including
Potable equipments), electrical switchboards, distribution panels etc. to prevent
electrical shocks to the workers.
 Cables were selected after full consideration of the condition to which they have
exposed and the duties for which they are required. Supply cable up to 3.3 kV shall be
in accordance with BS 6346.
 For supplies to mobile or transportable equipment where operating of the equipment
subjects the cable to flexing, the cable shall conform to any of these codes BS 6007 / BS
6500 / BS 7375.
 Flexible cords with a conductor cross sectional area smaller than 1.5 mm2 shall not be
used and insulated flexible cable shall conform to BS 6500 and BS 7375.
 Where low voltage cables are to be used, reference have made to BS 7375. The
following standards shall also be referred to particularly for underground cables BS 6346
and BS 6708.
 Plugs, socket-outlets, and couplers available in the construction site as “Splash Proof”.
The minimum degree of ingress protection was IP44 in accordance with BS EN 60529.
 Only plugs and fittings of the weatherproof type shall be used, and they should be color
in accordance with the internationally recognized standards for example as detailed as
followed:
110 volts: Yellow
240 volts: Blue
415 volts: Red
 All electrical equipment has permanently numbered and a record kept of the date of
issue, date of last inspection and recommended inspection period.
 Fixed installation has been inspected at least at three months interval: routine
maintenance being carried out in accordance with equipment manufactures
recommendations.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 27 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.8 Lighting
 Enough site lighting, of the right type and at the right place was properly effective.
Lighting ought not to introduce the risk of electric shock. Therefore, 230V supplies
should be used for those fittings, which are robustly installed, and well out of reach e.g.
flood lighting or high-pressure discharge lamps.
 Selection of Luminaries
 The selection of luminaries was as per the area requirement indicated below:
Type of Area of
S. No Luminaries
Lighting Requirement
Shovel type: non-
Workmen and symmetrical
Area
1 vehicles to move Symmetrical or non-
Lighting
about in safely. symmetrical tungsten
halogen
Portable flood light (Conical
Concentrated light
beam) Wide angle flood (fan
Beam flood over an area from a
2 shaped beam)
lighting relatively great
Medium or narrow angle
distance.
flood (Conical beam)
Dispersive (Mercury
Dispersive
3 Lighting for indoor florescent) Cargo cluster
lighting
florescent trough
Lighting for stairways, Well glass unit
Walkway ladder, corridors, Bulkhead unit (tungsten
4
lighting scaffold access routes, filament) Bulkhead unit
etc. (Florescent)
PAR (Parabolic Aluminized
Lighting on sites and Reflector) lamp cluster
Local fittings are generally Festoons (with or without
5
lighting accessible to shades) Adjustable florescent
operatives work lamp Portable flood
lamp
 Luminaries have always been placed so that no person is required to work in their own
shadow and so that the local light for one person is not a source of glare for the others.
Strongly made clamps should be available for attaching luminaries to poles and other
convenient supports.
 Luminaries should be robust, resistant to corrosion and rain proof especially at the
point of the cable entry.
 The correct type of lamp for each luminaries should always be used and when lamps
need to be replaced if shall be in accordance with the supply voltage.
 Lamp holders not fitted with a lamp should be capped off.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 28 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Minimum Lighting Requirements area wise shall be maintained;


Luminance
SN Facility or Function (Lux) (Im/ft2)
Administrative areas (offices, drafting and meeting 540 (50)
1
rooms, etc.)
Construction areas
 General indoor 55 (5)
 General outdoor 33 (3)
2  Tunnel and general underground work areas 55 (5)
(minimum 110 lux required at tunnel and shaft
heading during drilling,
 mucking and scaling)
Access ways
3
Exit ways, Walkways, Ladders, Stairs 110 (10)
Maintenance / Operating areas / shops
 Vehicle maintenance shop 325 (30)
 Carpentry shop 110 (10)
 Outdoors field maintenance area 55 (5)
4
 Refueling area, outdoors Shops 55 (5)
 Fine details workshops 540 (50)
 Medium detail work 325 (30)
 Welding shop 325 (30)
5 Mechanical/electrical equipment rooms 110 (10)
6 Hoists, Elevators, freight and passenger 215 (20)
Warehouses and storage rooms/area
 Indoor stockroom, active/bulk storage 110 (10)
7
 Indoor rack storage 270 (25)
 Outdoor storage 33 (3)
8 Health Centers, First aid stations & Infirmaries 325 (30)
9 Toilets, wash and dressing rooms 110 (10)
10 Work areas general (not listed above) 325 (30)
11 Parking areas 33 (3)
12 Visitor areas 215 (20)
13 Laboratories 540 (50)
16.9 Hand Tools and Power Tools
16.9.1 General
 Use of short / damaged hand tools have been avoided and the Contractor have
ensured all his hand tools used at his worksite are safe to work with or stored and have
also train their employees (including his sub-contractors) for proper use thereby.
 All hand tools and power tools have been duly inspected before use for safe operation.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 29 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 All hand tools and power tools had sufficient grip and the design specification on par
with national / international standards on anthropometrics.
16.9.2 Hand tools
 Hand tools shall include saws, chisels, axes and hatches, hammers, hand planes, screw
drivers, crow bars, and nail pullers.
 The EPI will ensure that,
i. For crosscutting of hardwood, saws with larger teeth points (no. of points per
inch) have been preferred to avoid the saw jumping out of the job.
ii. Mushroom headed chisels was not be used in the worksite where the
fragments of the head may cause injury.
iii. Unless hatchet has a striking face, it was be used as a hammer.
iv. Only knives of retractable blades have been used in the worksite.
v. No screwdrivers have been used for scraping, chiseling or punching holes.
vi. A pilot hole was always be driven before driving a screw.
vii. Wherever necessary, usage of proper PPEs was used by their employees.
16.9.3 Power tools
 Power tools include drills, planes, routers, saws, jackhammers, grinder, and sprayer,
chipping hammers, air nozzles and drills.
 The EPI will ensure that,
i. Electric tools are properly grounded or / and double insulated.
ii. GFCIs/ RCCBs was used with all portable electric tool operated especially
outdoors or in wet condition.
iii. Before making any adjustments or changing attachments, their workers have
disconnected the tool from the power source.
iv. When operating in confined spaces or for prolonged periods, hearing
protection shall be required. The same shall also apply to working with
equipment’s, which gives out more noise.
v. Tool is held firmly, and the material was properly secured before turning on the
tool.
vi. All drills had suitable attachments respective of the operations and powerful
for ease of operation.
vii. When any work / operation needs to be performed repeatedly or continuously,
tools specifically designed for that work was used. The same is applicable to
detachable tool bit also.
viii. Size of the drill have been determined by the maximum opening of the chuck
in case of drill bit.
ix. Attachments such as speed reducing screwdrivers and buffers have been
provided to prevent fatigue and undue muscle strain to his workers.
x. Stock should be clamped or otherwise secured firmly to prevent it from moving.
xi. Workers shall never stand on the top of the ladder to drill holes in walls/
ceilings, which can be hazardous, instead standing on the fourth or fifth rung
shall be recommended.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 30 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

xii. Electric plane shall not be operated with loose clothing or long scarf or open
jacket.
xiii. Safety guards used on right angle head or vertical portable grinders must cover
a minimum of 180° of the wheels and the spindle / wheel specifications shall be
checked.
xiv. All power tools / hand tools shall have guards at their nip points.
xv. Low profile safety chain shall be used in case of wood working machines and
the saw shall run at high rpm when cutting and correct chain tension shall be
ensured to avoid “Kick Back”.
xvi. Leather aprons and gloves shall be used as an additional personal protection
auxiliary to withstand kickback.
xvii. Push sticks shall be provided and properly used to hold the job down on the
table while the heels move the stock forward and thus preventing kickbacks.
xviii. Air pressure is set at a suitable level for air actuated tool or equipment being
used. Before changing or adjusting pneumatic tools, air pressure shall be turned
off.
xix. Only trained employees shall use explosive actuated tools and the tool shall
also be unloaded when not in use.
xx. Usage of such explosive actuated tools shall be avoided in case of places where
explosive/flammable vapors or gases may be present.
xxi. Explosive actuated tools and their explosives shall be stored separately and be
taken out and loaded only before the time of immediate use.
xxii. Misfired cartridges of explosive actuated tools must be placed in a container of
water and be removed safely from the project.
xxiii. No worker shall point any power operated / hand tool to any other person
especially during loading / unloading.
16.10 Welding, Gouging and Cutting
 Gas cylinders in use shall be kept upright on a custom-built stand or trolley fitted with
a bracket to accommodate the hoses and equipment or otherwise secured. The metal
cap shall be kept in place to protect the valve when the cylinder is not connected for
use.
 Hose clamp or clip shall be used to connect hoses firmly in both sides of cylinders and
torches.
 All gas cylinders shall be fixed with pressure regulator and dial gauges
 Non-return valve and Flashback arrester shall be fixed at both end of cylinder and
torch.
 Domestic LPG cylinders shall not be used for Gas welding and cutting purpose.
 DCP or CO2 type Fire Extinguisher not less than 5 kg shall be fixed at or near to welding
process zone in an easily accessible location. Fire Extinguisher should confirm to IS
2190: 1992.
 Use firewatchers if there is a possibility of ignition unobserved by the operator (e.g.
on the other side of bulkheads).

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 31 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Oxygen cylinders and flammable gas cylinders shall be stored separately, at least 6.6
meters (20 feet) apart or separated by a fireproof, 1.5 meters (5 feet) high partition.
Flammable substances shall not be stored within 15 meters of cylinder storage areas.
 Transformer used for electrical arc welding shall be fixed with Ammeter and Voltmeter
and fixed with separate main power switch.
 Welding grounds and returns should be securely attached to the work by cable lugs,
by clamps in the case of stranded conductors, or by bolts for strip conductors. The
ground cable will not be attached to equipment or existing installations or apparatus.
 Use a low voltage open circuit relay device if welding with alternating current in
constricted or damp places.
 Take precautions against the risk of increased fume hazards when welding with
chrome containing fluxed consumables or high current metal inert gas (MIG) or
tungsten inert gas (TIG) processes.
 Avoid being in contact with water or wet floors when welding. Use duckboards or
rubber protection.
 All electrical installations shall meet the IS: 5571: 1997 and NFPA 70 for gas cylinder
storage area and other hazardous areas.
 The current for Electric arc welding shall not exceed 300A on a hand welding
operation.
16.11 Fire Prevention, Protection and Fighting System
 The EPI shall ensure that construction site is provided with fire extinguishing
equipment sufficient to extinguish any probable fire at construction site. An adequate
water supply is provided at ample pressure as per national standard.
 Recharging of fire extinguishers and their proper maintenance should be ensured and
as a minimum should meet Indian National Standards
 All drivers of vehicles, foreman, supervisors and managers shall be trained on
operating the fire extinguishers and fire-fighting equipment.
 The Contractor shall also give consideration to the provision of adequate fire-fighting
arrangements within the underground and tunneling operations including the
provision of Fire Service compatible hose connections and emergency lighting.
 As per the TNBOCW Rules “all lifting appliance” driver cabin should be provided with
a suitable portable fire extinguisher.
 Combustible scrap and other construction debris should be disposed of site on a
regular basis. If scrap is to be burnt on site, the burning site should be specified and
located at a distance no less than 12metres from any construction work or any other
combustible material.
 Emergency plans and Fire Evacuation plans shall be prepared and issued. Mock drills
should be held on a regular basis to ensure the effectiveness of the arrangements and
as a part of the Programme, the Telephone Number of the local fire brigade should be
prominently displayed near each telephone on site.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 32 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.12 Excavation
EPI will ensure that:
 Where any construction building worker engaged in excavation is exposed to hazard
of falling or sliding material or article from any bank or side of such excavation which
is more than one 1.5 m above his footing, such worker is protected by adequate piling
and bracing against such bank or side.
 Where banks of an excavation are undercut, adequate shoring is provided to support
the material or article overhanging such bank.
 Excavated material is not stored at least 0.65 m from the edge of an open excavation
or trench and banks of such excavation or trench are stripped of loose rocks and the
banks of such excavation or trench are stripped of loose rocks and other materials
which may slide, roll or fall upon a construction building worker working below such
bank.
 Metal ladders and staircases or ramps are provided, as the case may be, for safe access
to and egress from excavation where, the depth of such excavation exceeds 1.5 m and
such ladders, staircases or ramps comply with the IS 3696 Part 1&2 and other relevant
national standards.
 Trench and excavation are protected against falling of a person by suitable measures
if the depth of such trench or excavation exceeds 1.5 m and such protection is an
improved protection in accordance with the design and drawing of a professional
engineer, where such depth exceeds 4m.
16.12.1 Piling (if Required)
General Precautions
 There are certain hazards which are common to all types of piling, and the following
precautions are necessary:
 Prior to piling, all underground services should be located and made safe. A check
should be made to ensure there are no cellars, underground water courses or ground
conditions which might cause hazards; there should be a firm level base for the crane,
or crane mats provided;
 when working on piling operations one must wear a safety helmet, and ear and eye
protection where necessary;
 All cranes, lifting appliances and lifting gear must have appropriate certificates of
testing and thorough examination, and should be large enough for the job.
 Particular attention should be paid to the risk of damage to lifting gear from sharp
edges;
 Cranes used for raising or lowering workers must be fitted with a dead man’ handle
and lowering should be done under power; you must be carried in properly
constructed cages which cannot spin or tip;
 Piling contractors should be asked to provide a written method statement setting out
the precautions relevant to the type of piling they are to employ;
 Induction training and information for you as supervisor or operative should be
specifically related to the method statement.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 33 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.12.2 Bored Piles (If Required)


 Workers may need to enter a borehole for inspection or for clearing out in undercuts,
and there are certain precautions which must be taken prior to entry:
 The borehole should be at least 75 cm in diameter;
 The borehole should be treated as a confined space and the precautions which are
advised elsewhere to ensure a satisfactory atmosphere must be closely followed;
 Waste material from the borehole should be kept clear of the borehole;
 Descent into a borehole should be in properly designed skips, chains or cages fitted
with an anti-spin device. The power source of the lifting appliance should be kept
running throughout the time someone is underground; While a worker is working
down a borehole, he/she must wear a safety harness;
 All workers concerned must be trained and competent in rescue from deep boreholes,
and emergency rescue drills should be carried out at regular intervals;
 A banksman who can see workers in the borehole should always be present;
 There must be adequate lighting at safe reduced voltage and a means of
communication from the borehole.
 Wherever possible, the need for workers to enter pile boreholes should be avoided
using television cameras and other techniques for remote inspection.
16.13 Work Permit System
 The EPI will develop a Work Permit system, which is a formal written system used to
control certain types of work that are potentially hazardous. A work permit is a
document, which specifies the work to be done, and the precautions to be taken. Work
Permits form an essential part of safe systems of work for many construction activities.
They allow work to start only after safe procedures have been defined and they
provide a clear record that all foreseeable hazards have been considered. Permits to
Work are usually required in high-risk areas as identified by the Risk Assessments.
 A permit is needed when construction work can only be carried out if normal
safeguards are dropped or when new hazards are introduced by the work. Examples
of high-risk activities include but are not limited to:
i. Working at height
ii. Entry into confined spaces
iii. Work near overhead power lines and telecommunication cables
iv. Hot work
v. To dig where underground services may be located
vi. Work with heavy moving machinery
vii. Working on electrical equipment
viii. Work with radioactive isotopes
ix. Heavy lifting operations and lifting operations closer to live power line (etc.)
 The permit-to-work system should be fully documented, laying down:
i. How the system works;
ii. The jobs it is to be used for;
iii. The responsibilities and training of those involved; and
iv. How to check its operation;
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 34 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 A Work Permit authorization form shall be completed with the maximum duration
period not exceeding 12 hours.
 A copy of each Permit-to-Work shall be displayed, during its validity, in a conspicuous
location near the actual works location to which it applies.
16.14 Traffic Management
 The basic objective of the following guidelines is to lay down procedures to be adopted
by Contractor to ensure the safe and efficient movement of traffic and to ensure the
safety of workmen at construction sites.
 All construction workers should be provided with high visibility jackets with reflective
tapes if they are deployed at vehicle movement area. The conspicuity of workmen
always shall be increased to protect from speeding vehicular traffic.
 The guiding principles to be adopted for safety in construction zone are to:
i. Warn the road user clearly and sufficiently in advance.
ii. Provide safe and clearly marked lanes for guiding road users.
iii. Provide safe and clearly marked buffer and work zones
iv. Provide adequate measures that control driver behavior through construction
zones.
16.14.1 Legal permission
 In all cases, the EPI shall ensure proper precautions. Wherever operations
undertaken are likely to interfere with public traffic, specific traffic management
plans shall be drawn up and implemented by the Contractor in consultation with
the approval of local police authorities and/or the concerned metropolitan / civil
authorities as the case may be.
 Such traffic management plans shall include provision for traffic diversion and
selection of alternative routes for transport of equipment. If necessary, the
Contractor shall carry out road widening before commencement of works to
accommodate the extra load.
 The primary traffic control devices used in work zones shall include signs,
delineators, barricades, cones, pylons, pavement markings and flashing lights.
 The road construction and maintenance signs which fall into the same three major
categories as do other traffic signs, that are Regulatory Signs, Warning Signs and
Direction (or guidelines) Signs shall only be used. The IRC: 67 (Code of Practice for
Road Signs) provide a list of traffic signs. The size, colors and placement of sign
shall confirm to IRC: 67.
16.14.2
Regulatory signs
 Regulatory signs impose legal restriction on all traffic. It is essential, therefore, that
they are used only after consulting the local police and traffic authorities.
 Warning signs
 Warning signs in the traffic control zone shall be utilized to warn the drivers of
specific hazards that may be encountered.
 The EPI shall place detour signage at strategic locations and install appropriate
warning signs. In order to minimize disruption of access to residences and business,
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 35 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

the Contractor shall maintain at least one entrance to a property where multiple
entrances exist.
 A warning sign need to be installed at all secondary road which merges with the
primary road where the construction work is in progress at enough distance before
it merges with the primary road to alert the road
 Materials hanging over / protruded from the chassis / body of any vehicle especially
during material handling shall be indicated by red indicator (red light/flag) to
indicate the caution to the road users.
16.14.3 Delineators
 The delineators are the elements of a total system of traffic control and have two
distinct purposes:
i. To delineate and guide the driver to and along a safe path
ii. As a taper to move traffic from one lane to another.
 These channelizing devices such as cones, traffic cylinders, tapes and drums shall
be placed in or adjacent to the roadway to control the flow of traffic. These should
normally be retro- reflectors complying with IRC: 79 - Recommended Practice for
Road Delineators.
16.14.4 Traffic cones and cylinders
 Traffic cones of 500mm, 750mm and 1000mm high and 300mm to 500mm in
diameter or in square shape at base and are often made of plastic or rubber and
normally have retro- reflectorized red and white band shall be used wherever
required.
16.14.5 Drums
 Drums about 800mm to 1000mm high and 300mm in diameter can be used either
as channelizing or warning devices. These are highly visible, give the appearance of
being formidable objects and therefore command the respect of drivers.
16.14.6 Boundary marking/ Restricting access to site
 Temporary/ permanent work shall be protected by Caution tapes to avoid
unauthorized entry to the work site and to prevent the working area from the risk
of accidents. Same to protect the road users from the danger due to construction
equipment and other temporary structures.
 Work area boundary shall be marked and identified on wooden pegs clearly.
 Work related hazards shall be displayed using sign boards to inform/ caution/
communicate the unauthorized personnel accessing nearby.
 Site entry register shall be maintained for the all the person including Client/
Visitors/ suppliers etc. entering the work area.
.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 36 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.14.7 Cleaning of roads


 Ensure that the cleanliness of roads and footpaths by deploying proper manpower
for the same. The Contractor shall have to ensure proper brooming, cleaning
washing of roads and footpaths on all the time throughout the entire.
16.14.8 Construction Machinery
Construction machineries may include dumpers and dump trucks, lift trucks and
telescopic handlers piling rigs, vibro hammers, rail welding equipments, mobile
elevating work platforms, cranes, tipper lorries, lorry loaders, skip wagons, 360°
excavators, 180° backhoe loaders, crawler tractors, scrapers, graders, loading shovels,
trenchers, side booms, pavers, planers, chippers, road rollers, locomotives, tankers
and browsers, trailers, hydraulic and mechanical breakers etc.
16.14.9 Safe worthiness certificate
 Every construction equipment shall be in sound mechanical working condition and
certified by either competent person under factories act or warranty in case of
brand new equipment or authorized persons/ firm approved by Client/ owners
before induction to site
16.14.10 Reverse Horns
 All vehicle shall be fitted with audible reverse alarm and maintained in good
working condition. Reversing shall be done only when there is adequate rear view
visibility or under the direction of banks man.
16.14.11 General operating procedures
 Drivers entering site shall be instructed to follow the safe system f work adopted
on site. There shall be verbal instruction or preferably written instruction showing
the relevant site rules, the site layout, delivery areas, speed limits, etc.
 No passengers shall be carried, unless specific seating has been provided in
accordance with the manufacture recommendations
 Working on gradients beyond any equipments capability shall not be allowed.
 Prevention of dumper and dump truck accidents should be managed by providing
wheel stops at a sufficient distance from edges of excavations, spoils heaps, pits
etc.
 If excavators operating on a gradient which cannot be avoided, it must be ensured
that the working cycle is slowed down, that the bucket is not extended too far in
the downhill direction and that travel is undertaken with extreme caution. A large
excavator must never be permitted to travel in a confined area or ground people
without a banks man to guide the driver, who should have the excavator
attachment close in to the machine, with the bucket just clear of the ground. On
wheeled excavators, it is essential that the tyres are in good condition and
correctly inflated. If stabilizing devices are fitted, they should be employed when
the machine is excavating.
 When the front shovel of the 180° backhoe loaders is being employed, the backhoe
 When operating the backhoe in poor ground conditions, the stabilizers tend to sink
into the surface of the ground reducing stability. Therefore frequent checks shall
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 37 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

be made for the stability of the machine. The loading shovels should always be
lowered to the ground to stabilize the machine when the backhoe is employed.
 The netting operation of the skip wagons should be carried out prior to lifting the
skip to reduce the risks of working on the rear platform.
 If a tractor dozer is employed on clearing scrub or felling trees, it shall be provided
with adequate driver protection.
 When two or more scrapers are working on the same job, a minimum distance of
at least 25m shall be kept between them.
 In case of hydraulic breakers, hydraulic rams and hoses shall be in good working
condition.
 All wood working machines shall be fitted with suitable guards and devices such
as top guard, riving knife, and push stick, guards for drive belts and chains, and
emergency stop switch easily accessible by the operator.
16.14.12 Requirements related to use of Bulldozers
 Be careful when working near the edge of banks, ditches, cuts or fills, or near
Overhanging material. The vibration and weight of the machine may cause the edge
to give way or overhanging material to fall.
 Before starting work, ensure that an observer is present when plant is required to
work in water where the depth may endanger the operator.
 Avoid obstacles such as rocks or logs. If forced to cross them, use extreme caution
and change to the lowest gear.
 Ease up to the balance point and ease down to minimize the jolt on contact with
the other side.
 When receiving a wire rope on a drum or through Sheaves, operators should
disengage the master clutch, idle the engine, and lock the brakes.
16.14.13 Clearing Operations
 (When clearing trees, watch out for dead branches in treetops.
 (Dozer operators should make sure that all persons are standing clear before
pushing over trees, dozing rocks or rolling logs.
 (A long rope should be used to pull over large dead trees. (Make sure in advance
that a falling tree will clear the machine and operator).
 In excavation work, operators should be alert to dangers from overhanging dirt
and rocks. In such cases, dozers should be equipped with the relevant overhead
protection.

16.14.14 Requirements related to use of Excavators


 When excavating trenches, place the excavated material at a distance of one and
a half times the depth of the trench from the edge of that trench. Where this is
not practicable, place excavated materials at least one (1) metre from the edge of
the trench.
 Ensure the ground beneath the machine is not undercut.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 38 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 (Watch boom clearance when travelling. Uneven ground may cause the boom to
weave and collide with obstructions.
 Avoid jerky slewing or sudden braking. These can make the machine unstable and
overload machine components.
 Ensure the operator has the appropriate restricted operator’s license if the
excavator is to be used in the crane mode.
 When an excavator is used in the crane mode, check that the lifting weight is well
within the approved lifting capacity for the machine. This lifting capacity shall be
clearly and permanently marked on each machine.
 Only operate attachments while stationary, as operation during travelling may
starve one of the track drive motors and result in an unintended turn.
 Consider implementing a “Permit to work” system, particularly when working near
power lines or underground power for example: - that the height of power lines is
known; - that the underground location is known; and - visible measure, such as
tiger tails, are put in place.
16.14.15 Requirements related to use of Trucks
 Driver defensively
 Obey road signs
 Never race with other vehicles
 When following another vehicle, always allow enough distance to stop safely.
 One truck length for every 10 km per hour of truck speed should be the minimum
distance between vehicles.
 Reversing is the most hazardous truck operation. Reversing alarm which are fitted
on truck are effective in warning person of the danger. Reverse truck only when
they are under the direction of a signalman or when satisfied that the way is clear
and will remain clear.
 Be cautious of spillage from loaded units and any hazards the spillage might
present to people on the ground and to the tires of other plant
 Use a protective beam or timber baulk or back under the control of a signalman in
order to avoid this happening.
 Where ground conditions are soft, or the tip head is likely to subside, dump loads
back from the edge and have a dozer move the material over the edge.
 Watch for and avoid other vehicles, personnel and rock outcrops on entering or
leaving the loading area.
 Stay a safe distance from trucks ahead at the loading point, and follow the
directions of the signalman or loader operator before moving into the loading
position.
 Where material is to be transported on a public road, maintain a distance of 1.2
meter or more beyond the front or rear of the vehicle, or 150 mm on either side,
shall have a visible red flag or object fastened to the projecting end.
 Truck operators are responsible for giving load placement requirements to crane
operators before loading operations begin.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 39 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 The load should be placed so that it will remain stable during loading, unloading
and travelling.
 Lower truck bodies before leaving the dump area.
 Only raise truck bodies to unload materials on surfaces where the vehicle will
remain stable and upright.
 Never raise truck bodies to within a specified distance of overhead power line.
 Take special care when tipping a load or spreading screenings on a road.
 With the tray up, trucks are less stable and are more likely to roll over, particularly
on hilly sections or roads with surface irregularities or steep shoulders.
 Check that the raised tray will not foul overhead power lines or telephone wires.
 Never place part of your body under a raised truck body unless the truck body is
securely propped.
 Trucks shall not be used to transport personnel unless they are specifically
designed to do so.
 Where a bus is employed for the transportation of personnel, the bus shall: -be
enclosed; have seats which are attached to the vehicle; have a safe means of
access and exit; and, have two means of exit in case of emergency.
16.15 Manual Lifting And Carrying Of Excessive Weight
 The Contractor shall ensure at his construction site of a building or other construction
work that no building worker lifts by hand or carries overhead or over his back or
shoulders any material, article, tool or appliances exceeding in weight as said below
as per Rule 38 of BOCWR, unless aided by another building worker or device.
Gender Person Maximum weight in kg
Adult man 55 Adult man 55
Adult woman 30 Adult woman 30

 No building worker aided by other building worker shall lift or carry weight higher than
or exceeding the sum of total of maximum limits set out for each building worker
separately as mentioned in the table above

16.16 Occupational Health And Welfare


16.16.1 Physical Fitness of Workmen
 The EPI will ensure his employees / workmen subject themselves to such medical
examination as required under the law or under the contract provision and keep
a record of the same. They are not permitting any employee / workmen to enter
the work area under the influence of alcohol or any drugs.
16.16.2 Medical Facilities

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 40 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 The EPI will arrange a medical examination of all his employees including his sub-
contractor employees employed as drivers, operators of lifting appliances and
transport equipment before employing, after illness or injury, if it appears that
the illness or injury might have affected his fitness and, thereafter, once in every
two years up to the age of 40 and once in a year, thereafter.
 Maintain the confidential records of medical examination or the physician
authorized by the Client/ Owner.
 No building or other construction worker is charged for the medical examination
and the cost of such examination is borne by EPI employing such building worker.
 The medical examination shall include:
i. Full medical and occupational history
ii. Clinical examination with particular reference to
iii. General Physique;
iv. Vision: Total visual performance using standard orthorator like Tetanus’s
Vision Tester should be estimated and suitability for placement
ascertained in accordance with the prescribed job standards.
v. Hearing: Persons with normal must be able to hear a forced whisper at
twenty-four feet. Persons using hearing aids must be able to hear a
warning shout under noisy working conditions.
vi. Breathing: Peak flow rate using standard peak flow meter and the average
peak flow rate determined out of these readings of the test performed.
The results recorded at pre-placement medical examination could be used
as a standard for the same individual at the same altitude for reference
during subsequent examination
vii. Upper Limbs: Adequate arm function and grip
viii. Spine: Adequately flexible for the job concerned.
ix. Lower Limbs: Adequate leg and foot concerned
x. General: Mental alertness and stability with good eye, hand and foot
coordination.
xi. Any other tests which the examining doctor considers necessary
 If they fail to get the medical examination conducted as mentioned above, the
client has the right to get the same conducted by through an agency with
intimation to the Contractor and deduct the cost and overhead charges.

16.16.3 Occupational Health Centre


 Ensure at a construction site an occupational health center, mobile or static is
provided and maintained in good order. Services and facilities as per the scale lay
down in Schedule X of BOCWR. A construction medical officer appointed in an
occupational health center, possess the qualification as laid down in Schedule XI
of BOCWR.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 41 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

16.16.4 Ambulance van and room


 To ensure at a construction site of a building or other construction work that an
ambulance van and room are provided at such construction site or an
arrangement is made with a nearby hospital for providing such ambulance van for
transportation of serious cases of accident or sickness of workers to hospital
promptly and such ambulance van and room are maintained in good repair and is
equipped with standard facilities specified in Schedule IV and Schedule V of
BOCWR.
16.16.5 First-aid boxes
 The Contractor shall ensure at a construction site one First-aid box for 100 workers
provided and maintained for providing First-aid to the building workers. Every
First-aid box is distinctly marked “FIRST AID BOX” as specified in Schedule III of
BOCWR
16.16.6 Drinking Water
 Effective arrangements made in the building will be made use to provide sufficient
supply of drinking water with minimum quantity of 5 liters per workman per day.
 Drinking water facility will be in storeroom within 200m from the place of work
for all staffs.
16.16.7 Latrine and Urinal Accommodation
 To provide one latrine seat for every 20 workers up to 100 workers and thereafter
one for every additional 50 workers. In addition, one urinal accommodation shall
be provided for every 100 workers.
 When women are employed, separate latrine and urinals accommodation shall be
provided on the same scale as mentioned above.
 Latrine and urinals shall be provided as per Section 33 of BOCWA and maintained
as per Rule 243 of BOCWR and shall also comply with the requirements of public
health authorities
16.16.8 HIV/ AIDS prevention and control
 EPI will engage a professional agency for implementing the guidelines laid down
in the policy and communicate to the Contractor.
 EPI shall extend necessary support to the appointed agency by deputing the
workmen to attend the awareness creation programmes.
 The peer educators on completion of the training shall serve as the focal point for
any information, education and awareness campaign among the workmen
throughout the contract period.
 The peer educators will be paid a monthly honorarium as fixed by the Client/
Owner for rendering his services in addition to his regular duty.
 The total number of peer educators (1 for 100 workers) shall always be
maintained by the Contractor.
 In case if these peer educators leave the Contractor by creating vacancy, then the
Contractor agency for the purpose.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 42 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 It is suggested to the Contractor that due care should be taken to select the peer
educators from among the group of workmen so that they remain with the
Contractor throughout the contract period.
16.16.9 Prevention of mosquito breeding
 Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding at site. The measures to
be taken shall include:
Empty cans, oil drums, packing and other receptacles, which may retain water
shall be deposited at a collection point and shall be removed from the site
regularly.
 There should not be accumulation of still water at any site, In case of still water,
it should be covered by earth and levelled.
 Equipment and other items on the site, which may retain water, shall be stored,
covered or treated in such a manner that water could not be retained.
 Water storage tanks shall be provided.
 At periodic interval shall arrange to prevent mosquito breeding by fumigation /
spraying of insecticides. Most effective insecticides shall include SOLFAC WP 10 or
Baytex, The Ideal Larvicide etc.
16.16.10 Alcohol and drugs
 The Contractor shall ensure at all times that no employee is working under the
influence of alcohol / drugs which are punishable under Government regulations.
 Smoking at public worksite by any employee is also prohibited as per Government
17. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
17.1 Air Quality
 All necessary precautions to minimize fugitive dust emissions from operations involving
excavation, grading, and clearing of land and disposal of waste. He shall not allow
emissions of fugitive dust from any transport, handling, construction or storage activity
to remain visible in atmosphere beyond the property line of emission source for any
prolonged period without notification to the client.
 Use construction equipment designed and equipped to minimize or control air
pollution. He shall maintain evidence of such design and equipment and make these
available for inspection by client
 Establish and maintain records of routine maintenance program for internal combustion
engine powered vehicles and equipment used on this project. We shall keep records
available for inspection by Client/ owner.
 Cover loads of dust generating materials like debris and soil being transported from
construction sites. All trucks carrying loose material should be covered and loaded with
sufficient free- board to avoid spills through the tailboard or sideboards.
 Promptly transport all excavation disposal materials of whatever kind so as not to delay
work on the project. Stockpiling of materials will only be allowed at sites designated by
the Client/ Owner. The Contractor shall place excavation materials in the dumping /
disposal areas designated in the plans as given in the specifications.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 43 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 The temporary dumping areas shall always be maintained by the EPI until excavate is
re-utilised for backfilling or as directed by Client/ Owner. Dust control activities shall
continue even during any work stoppage.
 Place material in a manner that will minimize dust production. Material shall be
minimized each day and wetted, to minimize dust production. During dry weather, dust
control methods must be used daily especially on windy, dry days to prevent any dust
from blowing across the site perimeter.
 Water down construction sites as required to suppress dust, during handling of
excavation soil or debris or during demolition. The EPI will make water sprinklers, water
supply and water delivering equipment available at any time that it is required for dust
control use. Dust screens will be used, as feasible when additional dust control
measures are needed especially where the work is near sensitive receptors
 Provide a wash pit or a wheel washing and/or vehicle cleaning facility at the exits from
work sites such as construction depots and batching plants. At such facility, high-
pressure water jets will be directed at the wheels of vehicles to remove all spoil and dirt.
 To submit to the Client/ Owner an Air Monitoring and Control Plan (AMCP) under
contract specific Site Environmental Plan to guide construction activity insofar as it
relates to monitoring, controlling and mitigating air pollution.
17.2 Air Monitoring
 Construction activities that will generate dust impacts include excavation (including
related activities), material handling and stockpiling, vehicular movement, and wind
erosion of unpaved work areas.
 The impact of fugitive dust on ambient air pollution depends on the quantity generated,
as well as the drift potential of the dust particles injected into the atmosphere. Large
dust particles will settle out near the source and smaller particles are likely to undergo
dispersal over greater distance from the sources and impeded settling. SPM levels will
be monitored to evaluate the dust impact during the construction phase of the Project.
 The Air Quality Monitoring and Control Plan (AMCP) in contract-specific Site
Environmental Plan prepared by the EPI shall establish procedures to monitor impact
air quality and measures to control air pollution including dust suppression due to
construction activities at work sites. This plan shall contain description of activities that
will cause degradation in air quality, environmental procedures to manage pollutants to
minimize the air pollution, monitoring program, record keeping and reporting.

17.3 Water Quality


 Complying with the Indian Government legislation and other State regulations in
existence in Nagpur insofar as they relate to water pollution control and monitoring. A
drainage system should be constructed at the commencement of the Works, to drain
off all surface water from the work site into suitable drain outlet.
 Adequate precautions to ensure that no spoil or debris of any kind is pushed, washed,
falls or deposited on land adjacent to the site perimeter including public roads or
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 44 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

existing stream courses and drains within or adjacent to the site. In the event of any
spoil or debris from construction works being deposited or any silt washed down to any
area, then all such spoil, debris or material and silt shall be immediately removed and
the affected land and areas restored to their natural state by the EPI to the satisfaction
of the Client.
 Mud slurry from drilling, excavation, wall construction or grouting etc. shall not be
discharged into the drainage system unless treatment is carried out that will remove
silt, mud particles, bentonite etc. The EPI shall provide treatment facilities as necessary
to prevent the discharge of contaminated ground water.
 Discharge wastewater arising out of site office, canteen or toilet facilities constructed
by him into sewers after obtaining prior approval of agency controlling the system. A
wastewater drainage system shall be provided to drain wastewater into the sewerage
system.
 The bentonite mixing, treatment and handling system shall be established by the EPI
giving due regard to its environmental impacts. The disposal of redundant bentonite
shall be carefully considered whether in bulk or liquid form. The disposal location will
be advised and agreed with the relevant authorities.
 Measures to prevent discharge of oil and grease during spillage from reaching drainage
system or any water body. Oil removal / interceptors shall be provided to treat oil waste
from workshop areas etc.
17.4 Waste
 Required to develop, institute and maintain a Waste Management Programme (WMP)
during the construction of the project for his works, which may include:
 Identification of disposal sites
 Identification of quantities to be excavated and disposed off
 Identification of split between waste and inert material
 Identification of amounts intended to be stored temporarily on-site location of such
storage.
 Identification of intended transport means and route.
 Obtaining permission, where required, for disposal.
 Such a mechanism is intended to ensure that the designation of areas for the
segregation and temporary storage of reusable and recyclable materials are incorporate
into the WMP. The WMP should be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
 Handle waste in a manner that ensures they are held securely without loss or leakage
thus minimizing potential for pollution. The EPI shall maintain and clean waste storage
areas regularly.
17.5 Energy Management
 Use and maintain equipment to conserve energy and shall be able
 Measures to conserve energy include but not limited to the following:
 Use of energy efficient motors and pumps
 Use of energy efficient lighting, which uses energy efficient luminaries

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 45 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Adequate and uniform illumination level at construction sites suitable for the task
 Proper size and length of cables and wires to match the rating of equipment
 Use of energy efficient air conditioners
 Design site offices maximum daylight and minimum heat gain. The rooms shall be well
insulated to enhance the efficiency of air conditioners and the use of solar films on
windows may be used where feasible.
17.6 Noise
 EPI shall consider noise as an environmental constraint in his design, planning request.
The EPI shall, at his own expense, take all appropriate measures to ensure that work
carried out by the EPI and by his sub-Contractors, whether on or off the Site, will not
cause any unnecessary or excessive noise which may disturb the occupants of any
nearby dwellings, schools, hospitals, or premises with similar sensitivity to noise.
 Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, noise level reduction measures
shall include the following:
 The EPI shall ensure that all powered mechanical equipment used in the Works
shall be effectively sound-reduced using the most modern techniques available
including but not limited to silencers and mufflers.
 The EPI shall construct acoustic screens or enclosures around any parts of the
Works from which excessive noise may be generated.
 EPI shall ensure that noise generated by work carried out by the EPI and sub-contractor
during the daytime and night time shall not exceed the maximum permissible noise
limit, whether continuously or intermittently. The same may be varied from time to time
by and at the sole discretion of the Client/ Owner. In the relevant of a breach of this
requirement, the EPI shall immediately re-deploy or adjust the relevant equipment or
take other appropriate measures to reduce the noise levels and thereafter maintain
them at levels which do not exceed the said limits. Such measures may include without
limitation the temporary or permanent cessation of use of certain items of equipments.
 The noise monitoring requirements are given in the project SHE Manual and the
monitoring locations shall be identified.
17.7 Noise Monitoring
 The activities which are expected to cause noise during the construction of Project,
include noise from construction equipment, construction activities such as portal
construction, boring for piling, earthwork excavation, concreting, viaduct construction
and removal of spoil and movement of construction vehicles and delivery vehicle
travelling to and from the construction and disposal sites.
 The level of impact of these noise sources depends upon the noise characteristics of the
equipment and activities involved the construction schedule, and the distance from
noise sensitive receptors.
 If the measured noise levels exceed the noise limits, the noise levels shall be reduced
by appropriate abatement measures.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 46 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 In no case shall the EPI expose the public to construction noise levels exceeding 90 dBA
(slow) or to impulsive noise levels with a peak sound pressure level exceeding 140 dB as
measured on an impulse sound level meter.
 Limit for construction noise is based on the existing ambient noise levels in areas
adjoining the construction sites.
 The noise levels emanating from any source during construction, shall not exceed 5 dBA
or more above existing ambient pre-construction noise levels. The same may be varied
from time to time and at the sole discretion of the Client/ owner.
 Where there are no ambient noise measurements, the construction activities shall be
limited to levels at a distance of 200 feet from the construction limits or at the nearest
affected building, whichever is closer,
Maximum Noise Level Lmax dBA
Land Use
Day Time Night Time
Residential 75 65
Commercial (all time) 85
Industrial (all time) 90

 When Diesel Generator (DG) Sets are used for operation of equipment and machinery,
then Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 shall apply.
 The EPI shall inform the Client/ owner of all steps taken to investigate cause of
exceedance and immediate action taken to avoid further exceedance through written
reports and proposals for action under an Event Contingency Plan.
17.8 Vibration Level
 In locations where the alignment is close to historical / heritage structures, the EPI shall
prepare a monitoring scheme prior to construction at such locations. This scheme for
monitoring vibration level at such historical / heritage sites shall be submitted to Client/
owner for his approval. This scheme shall include:
 Monitoring requirements for vibrations at regular intervals throughout the
construction period;
 Pre-construction structural integrity inspections of historic and sensitive
structures in project activity;
 Information dissemination about the construction method, probable effects,
quality control measures and precautions to be used;
 The vibration level limits at work sites adjacent to the alignment shall conform
to the permitted values.
18. WATER RESOURCE PROTECTION
Water source protection involves the protection of surface water sources (e.g. lakes,
rivers, man-made reservoirs) and groundwater sources (e.g. spring protection, dug well
protection, and drilled well protection) to avoid water pollution (see also pathogens and
contaminants).
While surface water sources and springs are directly exposed to human activities,
groundwater sources are often protected through overlaying soil layers. However, accessing
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 47 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

groundwater sources through dug or drilled wells allows contaminants to enter aquifers,
polluting the well itself and the water in nearby lakes, rivers, or neighboring wells, which
consequently threatens both public health and the environment.
In the past, the need for water source protection has often been neglected. As a consequence,
many drinking water sources have become contaminated making water purification measures
indispensable. The very slow flow of groundwater makes rehabilitation of contaminated
aquifers both costly and time-intensive. While removal of pathogenic contamination through
disinfection is more likely to be successful, some metals and chemical substances will
permanently remain in the soil.
Recently, establishing adequate water source protection has been recognized as the most
suitable and cost-effective method to keep contaminants out of drinking water and making
costly water purification measures and construction of new wells. This holds both for
industrialized and developing countries.
Implementing water source protection requires a legal framework. This usually involves a
protection plan, which formulates responsibilities, specific protection measures and basic
rules that apply to all community members and water source users.
18.1 Surface Water Source Protection Measures
As many surface water sources are used for drinking water purposes, protection is vital.
Generally, three basic strategies exist for protection.
 Prevention: No discharge of waste, pollutants or untreated water from domestic,
industrial or agricultural use; optimized water use and practices in agriculture in order
to stop nutrients from entering aquatic systems (e.g. establishing buffer zones).
 Treatment: treatment of polluted water prior to discharge; storm water management:
ensuring that run-off cannot transport pollutants into water bodies.
 Restore ecosystems: Enable or support natural rehabilitation processes.
18.2 Groundwater Source Protection Measures
Numerous simple preventative measures can be applied to protect springs, wells and
aquifers from contamination. They are presented in the following five steps.
Step 1: Location / Site Selection of the Water Source - Never Close to Pollutant Sources
 Before the drilling of a well or construction of a spring tapping starts, an appropriate
site has to be found. Villagers or landowners are a good source of information and
mostly point out a suitable location for them as users. However, several other
important aspects have to be kept in mind when selecting the optimal site for a water
source
18.3 A water point of any kind or source should be:
 Situated above the (seasonal) flood level of any nearby river or lake;
 In a location, which guarantees easy access for all water users all year round. This
refers to physical access but also to legal access.
 In proximity to the actual point of water use;
 In an area allowing the rapid dispersal of spilt water;

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 48 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 In a sunny area without shade to guarantee that the immediate well surroundings
remain dry, so as to prevent bacteria, algae, etc. to evolve.
 In a location where the level of the water table is at a depth of at least two meters
all year round (for wells);
 In distance from agricultural activities of any kind; particularly if pesticides or
fertilizers are applied.
 In an area not susceptible to erosion;
 In safe distance to saltwater and any source of pollution such as a pit latrine, abattoir,
dumping site, fertilizer or pesticide store, etc.
18.4 Set up Rules for all Community Members
Any protection plan rises and falls with the behaviour of the community members, their
attitude towards the plan and their knowledge. Besides the installation of constructional
measures, simple rules should be set up and communicated by a local caretaker.
Such rules can include:
 Don’t defecate close to the well,
 Don’t let your animals graze close to the well,
 Don’t throw any garbage into the well, etc.
 No sewer line will be connected to the water resource.
 No person/ workmen will be allowed for bathing, fishing at water resource area.
 Adequate site security shall be deployed for monitoring the same.
 All personnel will be restricted to water resource area by installing adequate fences
if required.
19. HAZARD IDENTIFICATION, RISK ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL PROCEDURE
 This is the procedure of identifying hazards, assessing the risk level and applying control
measure on each activities or process of the entire section to bring it to tolerable level so
as to carry out work in safe and healthy manner.
 This is applicable for entire division. Overall responsibility for procedure implementation
lies with the Site in-charge While Site engineer responsibility for procedure
implementation lies with the respective sectional heads.
 Description; Identification of Hazard associated with the activities carried out in the
division is done on
 Routine and non –routine activities
 Activities of all personnel having access to the workplace.
 Activities carried out during Abnormal and Emergency situations.
 Start up and Shut down.
 Human behaviors, capabilities and other human factors.
 Identified hazards originating outside the workplace capable of adversely affecting
the health and safety of person under the control of the organization within the
workplace,
 Hazards created in the vicinity of the workplace by work related activities under the
control of the organization.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 49 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Infrastructure, equipment and material at the workplace, whether provided by the


organization or others.
 Changed or proposed changes in the Division, its activities or materials;
 Modification to the SHE management system, including temporary changes, and
their impacts on operations, processes, and activities;
 Any applicable legal obligations relating to risk assessment and implementation of
necessary controls
 The design of work areas, processes, installations, machinery / equipment,
operating procedure and work origination, including their adaption to human
capabilities.

The activities are broken into simpler steps


and then the risk of occurrence of various
hazards associated with the activities,
Materials, Chemicals, Machines and other
Equipment’s etc. being used at the
workplace are identified.

Potential hazards which can be resulted


due to interactions of these risk factors are
identified as Physical injury, Physical
strain, Chemical attack, Electrical shock,
Fire Explosion and Toxicity.

Initially the risk is evaluated for the


activities without considering the control
measures for occurrence of the hazard and
then the risk in the activity is reevaluated
after considering the various existing
control measures used to control and
minimize the effects of the hazards
Remarks, recommendations are placed to
take care of residual risk.
Details for Evaluation of Risk are as follow.
 Various potential hazards are
identified and evaluated for the
risks associated with them in terms of a product factored by severity and
Probability. Each factor is quantified on the basis of rating.
 The severity is divided in to three levels Minor, Moderate & Serious. Probability
is divided in three levels Highly Unlikely, Unlikely & Likely.
 Risk assessment of the hazards identified is rated in five levels.
 Action will be taken against each level of Risk ratings.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 50 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 Risk level 4 & 5 is identified as Signification Risks and are mentioned as


Significant and Intolerable respectively. Appropriate SOP will be undertaken to
reduce these Risk levels.
 Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment will be reviewed every Quarter or
whenever there is new, activity, process, or service identified will be
incorporated in the list of HIRA as per the Management of Change considering
the Man/Machine/Materials / Process/Location and Design.
 Communication to new employees will be given during Induction program.
For Management of change, the organization shall identify the SHE hazards, and SHE
risks associated with the changes in the organization, the SHE management system, or
its activities, prior to the introduction of such changes. The organization should ensure
that the result of these assessments is considered when determining the control.
After the Risk level is taken following Hierarchy should be followed while determining
controls or considering changes to the existing controls.

19.1 Verification and Corrective Action


Safety in Charge will verify every year and take necessary corrective actions.
HIRA REVIEW
Responsibility
 Overall Responsibility for HIRA review- Concern Site In charge
 First Review by Concerned Site In charge
 Second Review by SHE section
 Implementation of Suggestions given is SHE review- Concerned Section Head
Criteria for HIRA Review
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 51 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

 If any Reportable or Non-Reportable incident in the section


 Any modification in process
 Any changes in Lay out
 Addition or Deletion of any activity
 Suggestion or Reports of Internal and External Audits.
 If any of above points are not applicable, then once in year.
After HIRA review give feedback to concerned section. It may be through mail or verbal after
joint discussion.
Verifications and Corrective Action
HSE section will verify that HIRA of all sections is reviewed. Accordingly, it must be
communicated to respective sections.
Records
Respective sections must keep the records of HIRA Review.
Risk Assessment Matrix: 3X3 Matrix

Review
HSE Specialist will review HIRA every year and suggests necessary corrective actions, if any.
It can be reviewed after internal & external audits also.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 52 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

20. APPENDIXES – SAFETY CHECKLIST/ FORMS

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 53 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

ACCIDENT / FIRE REPORT


(To be submitted by EPI after very accident within 24 hours of accident)
Report : ________________
Date : ________________
NAME OF SITE : __________________________________
CONTRACTOR : __________________________________
NAME OF THF. INJURED : __________________________________
FATHER’S NAME : __________________________________
SUB-CONTRACTOR. M/s : __________________________________
DATE & TIME OF ACCIDENT : __________________________________
Location : __________________________________
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF ACCIDENT
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Cause Of Accident
_________________________________________________________________________________
NATURE OF INJURY / DAMAGE
_________________________________________________________________________________
Medical Aid Provided / Actions Taken
_________________________________________________________________________________
Intimation To Local authorities
_________________________________________________________________________________

Date : SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR


WITH SEAL

To : OWNER ……………………………........ 1 COPY


: RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE CLIENT……1 COPY

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 54 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SUPPLEMENTARY ACCIDENT & INVESTIGATION REPORT


Project: ______________________________
Supplementary to Report No.__________________________ (Copy enclosed)
Site: __________________________ Date: __________________
Contractor _____________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Name of the. Injured ___________________________________________________________
Fathers Name ________________________________________________________________
sub-contractor. M/s. ___________________________________________________________
date & time of accident _____________________________________________________________
Location _______________________________________________________________________
brief description of accident
_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________
CAUSE OF ACCIDENT

_______________________________________________________________________________
NATURE OF INJURY /DAMAGE

_______________________________________________________________________________
Medical aid Provided / Actions Taken

_______________________________________________________________________________
Intimation To Local Authorities

_______________________________________________________________________________
DATE: SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR
WITH SEAL

To : OWNER ………………………. 1 COPY


: RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE CLIENT……. 1 COPY

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 55 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Monthly Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) REPORT


(To be submitted by contractor)
Actual work date _________________ For the Month of _____________________
Project: ______________________ Report No._______________________
Name of the Contractor _________________ Status as on:______________________
Name of Work ________________________ Name of safety Officer _________________
ITEM THIS MONTH CUMULATIVE
Total Strength { Staff + Workmen)
Number of HSE meetings organization at site
Number of HSE awareness programmes
conducted at site
Whether workmen compensation policy is Y/N -
taken
Whether workmen compensation policy is Y/N -
valid
Number of Fatal Accidents Y/N -
Number of Loss Time Accidents (Other than
Fatal)
Other accidents (Non Loss Time)
Total No, of Accidents
Man-hour loss due to fire and accidents
Compensation cases raised with Insurance
Compensation cases resolved and paid to
workmen
Remarks, if any

Date: Safety Officer / Resident Construction Manager


(Signature and Name)
To: - OWNER _____________________ 1 Copy
RCM/SITE IN- CHARGE, CLIENT 1 Copy

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 56 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Monthly HSE Checklist cum compliance report


Project : ______________________ Contractor : ______________________

Date: ________________________ Owner : _________________________

Inspection By _________________________

Note : Write ‘NA’ wherever the item is not applicable.

Sl. No. ITEM YES NO REMARKS ACTION


1. House Keeping
a) Waste containers provided and used
b) Sanitary facilities adequate and clean
c) Passageways art<J Walkways Clear
d) General neatness of working areas
e) Other
2 Personal Protective Equipment
a) Goggles; Shields
b) F ace protection
c) Hearing protection
d) Safety shoes
e) Hand protection
f) Respirator; / Masks etc.
g) Satiety Belts
h) Safety Helmet / Hard hat
i) Other
3. EXCAVATIONS / OPENINGS
a) Openings properly covered or barricaded
b) Excavation shored
c Excavations Barricaded
d) Overnight lighting provided
Others

4. WELDING & GAS CUTTING


a) Gas cylinders chained upright
b) Cables and hoses not obstructing

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 57 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

c) Screens or shields used


d) Flammable materials projected
e) Fire extinguisher (s) accessible
f) Other
5. SCAFFOLDING
a) Fully decked platforms
b) Guard and intermediate rails in place
c) Toe boards in ptaoe
d) Adequate shoring
e) Adequate access
f) Other
6) Ladders
a) Extension side rails 1 at above
b) Top of landing
c) Properly secured
d) Angle + 70* form horizontal
e) Other

7. HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS


a) Condition of cables and sheaves OK
b) Condition of slings, chains, hooks and eyes
c) Inspection and maintenance logs
maintained
d) Outriggers used
e) Signs / barricades provided
f) Signals observed and understood
g) Qualified operators
h) Other
8. MACHINERY , TOOLS AND
a) Proper instruction
b) Safety devices
c) Proper cords
d) Inspection and maintenance
e) Other
9. Vehicle and Traffic
a) Rules and regulations observed
b) Inspection and maintenance
c) Licensed drives

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 58 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

10. TEMPORARY FACILITIES


a) Emergency instruct ions posted
b) Fire extinguishers provided
c) Fire-aid equipment available
d) Secured against storm damage
e) General neatness
f) In accordance with electrical requirements
g) Other
14. FIRE PREVENTION
a) Personnel instructed
b) Fire extinguishers checked
c) No smoking in Prohibited areas.
e) Hydrants Clear
e) Other
12. ELECTRICAL
a) Use of 3-core armoured cables
b) Usage of ‘All insulated’ or ‘double-insulated’
c) All electrical connection arc routed through
d) Natural Earthing at the source of power (main
e) Continuity and tightness of earth conductor
f) Covering of junction boxes, panels and other
energized wiring places
g) Ground fault circuit interrupters provided
h) Prevention of tripping hazards
i) Other

13. handling and storage of managerial


a) Properly stored or stacked
b) Passageways clear
c) Other
d) FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
e) Containers clearly identified
f) Proper storage
g) Fire extinguishers nearby
h) Other

8. WORKING AT HEIGHT
a) Erection plan and work permit obtained
b) Safety nets

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 59 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

c) Safety belts, full body harness and lanyards;


chute lines
d) Other
14. CONFINED SPACE
a) Work Permit obtained
b) Test for toxic gas and sufficient availability
of oxygen conducted
c) Atleast one person outside the confined
space for monitoring deputed
d) Availability of sufficient means of entry, exit
and ventilation
e) Fire extinguisher and first-aid facility
ensured
f) Lighting provision made by using 24 Lamp
g) Proper usage of PPEs ensured
15. RADIOGRAPHY
a) Proper storage and handling of source as
per BARC guidelines
b) Working permit obtained

c) Cordoning of (he area done


d) Use of appropriate PPE’s ensured
e) Proper training to workers / Supervisors
f) Minimum occupancy of workplace
19. HEALTH CHECKS
a) Hygienic conditions at labour camps OK?
b) Availability of First Aid facilities.
c) Proper sanitation at site, office and labour
d) Arrangement of medical facilities
e) Measures for dealing with illness
f) Availability of Potable drinking water for
workmen & Staff
g) Provision of crèches for children.
20. ENVIRONMENT
a) Chemical and Other Effluents properly
disposed
b) Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off
properly
c) Seawater used for hydro-testing disposed
off as per agreed procedure

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 60 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

d) Lubricant Waste / Engine oils properly


disposed
c) Waste form Canteen, offices sanitation etc
disposed properly
0) Disposal of Oily rags and combustible
g) Green belt protection

Signature of EPI Site In-charge


With seal

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 61 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Permit for Working at Height (Above Two Meters)


(Strike out which ever is not applicable)

Project Site --------------------------------------------- Sr No. ---------------------------------------


Name of Contractor ------------------------------- Date ----------------------------------------------
Nature of work ------------------------------------- Exact location of work------------------------------
Total No. Of workers allowed ------------------------ -----------------------------------------
Duration of worker form ----------------------------- to -------------------------------------
The following items have been checked and compliance shall be ensured during the
Currency of the permit:

S.L. ITEM YES NOT DONE

1. Equipment / work area inspected

2. Considered Hazard form other routine / non-routing


Operations and concerned person alerted.

3. ELCB provided for electrical connection,

4. Proper lighting provided

5. Area cordoned off.

6. Precautions against public traffic taken

7. Sound Scaffolding provided & Green tage provided

8. Adequately provided with proper safety belt & helmet.

9. Access and Exit to the area (Ladder Properly fixed)

10. All persons provided with proper safety belt & helmet

14. Floor openings covered

12. Safety Net provided

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 62 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

A. Following Personal protective equipment are provided [mark] and use as relevant
.Safety Helmet Gloves Goggles / Face shield / life line/Safety belt / Safety
harness.
B. This permit shall be available at the work site at all times.
C. Permit shall be issued for maximum one week only [Monday to Sunday]
D. This shall be applicable in non-operations areas.
E. After completion of the work used permit shall be preserved for record purposes.
F. Additional precaution, if any;

PERMIT IS GRANTED TO WORK, (SEEL OVERLEAF) – YES / NO

NAME & SIGN OF NAME & SIGN OF


SITE ENGINEER (EPI) SAFETY ENGINEER (EPI)

REVIEWED BY CLIENT REVIEWED BY CLIENT

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 63 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

PERMIT EXTENSION
Sl. No. Validity period Work Time Initiators (SO site In Signature
(--------- To---------) From- (His). (Supervisor of charge Of the PMC
To (Hrs). the Contractor) Contractor)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Space for writing additional safety instruction.

Note: - Name of the person & their gate pass nos. permitted to work at height shall be entered daily
on separate sheet & shall be available along with the permit.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 64 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY INSPECTION CHECKLIST CONSTRUCTION SITE


Name of Construction Site :

Name of Contractor:

Date of Inspection:

S. No. Description YES NO REMARKS ACTION


1. USE OF PPE
a. All person are using safety helmet
b. All person are using safety belt while
working on or above 3m height
c. All welder / grinder using safety Google for
eye protection while doing
Welding/ grinding
d. Person were using dust respirator while
working inside column / vessel or in any
dusty atmosphere
e. Person were using dust respirator while
working inside column / vessel or in any
dusty atmosphere
2. LIFTING TOOLS & TACKLES
a All tools & tackle are duly stamped fit to
use by safety officers.
b. All sings & ropes are duly tested by
appropriate third party.
c. Pre use inspection check list system being
followed for crane, fork crane, fork lifts etc.
d. Drivers of crane / hydra having appropriate
valid licence.
3. Others construction Equip
a. Physical condition of welding M/C.
b. Whether equip. duly certified by the safety
officer of the company before entering
inside the construction site.
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 65 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

d. Grinding M/c having guard protection.


e. Welding M/c & D.G. set are properly
earthed
4. Electrical Equipment
a. Bared wire
b. Approval form statutory authority
wherever applicable
c. Male / Female socket provided for
electrical connection.
d. Availability of rubber gloves
e. Earthing of Equipment
5. Availability of ambulance at site
6. Scaffolding & ladder

a. All scaffolding material are of steel &


acceptable quality.
b. Whether erected scaffolding are duly
certified for “FIT TO USE” by
appropriate officer
c. Adequate resting platform
d. Ladder is resting platform
e. Ladder is properly placed at proper
angle
7. Fire fighting Equipment
a. Availability of fire extinguisher
b. Availability of fire hoses
8. Permit System
a. Valid permit system applicable
wherever applicable
b. Area barricaded as per requirement
9. House Keeping
a. All material / oil are properly stored
b. Floor are clean
c. Road unobstructed

Any other observation:

(Safety officer)

cc: Site In-charge/PMC


cc: Safety officer
Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 66 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

TOOL BOX TALK MEETING


Date: Location / Site:

Contractor:

Type of Activities Planned: : Backfilling


: Excavation
: Bar bending
: Material Handling (Manually / Mechanically)
: Concerting (PCC/RCC)
: Shuttering/ De-shuttering
: Working at and beyond + mtrs Height
: Welding / Gas-cutting/ grinding
; Alignment of Structure
: Erection of Steel/ Vessel / Equipments
: Shot Blasting/Painting
: Cable Pulling / Cable Laying
: House keeping

Name of Foreman / Supervisor controlling the specific Gang/labourers / workmen………………...

Number of Workmen under the control of above mentioned Foreman / Supervisor………………...


TO DO NOT TO DO

Signature of Foreman / Supervisor / Munshi………………………………..

Signature of Site Engineer of main Contractor …………………………….

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 67 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

Signature of Safety Engineer of main Contractor …………………………..

FOR CLIENT FOR OWNER

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 68 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST FOR WELDING GENERATOR


Contractor: M/s Date:

Equipment make:

Equipment Model:

Equipment S. No:

S. No. Item Status Remarks


1. All safety guards on moving parts
are in place
2. All cable are provided as per load
requirements
3. Condition of tyres.
4. Wiring with proper clamps and
without joints
5. Provision of Engine
6. Condition of Engine
7. Engine exhaust without leak and
damage
8. No leakage of Engine oil or fuel
9. Availability of fire extinguisher
nearby
10. Other remarks

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for use at
Construction site

Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer

Name: Name:

Signature: Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 69 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST FOR WELDING MACHINE


Contractor: M/s. Date:

Equipment make:

Equipment Model:

Equipment S.No:
S. No. Item Status Remarks
1. All body cover /electrical
insulation in sound condition
2. Electrical Cable without joint
3. Cable including welding and
ground cables with wron-out or
crack insulation
4. Condition of Welding Holder and
its insulation
5. Conditions of Electrical Switches
6. Earthing arrangement proper
7. Availability of proper face shield
and leather hand gloves for
welder
8. Other remarks

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for


use at
Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer
Name : Name :
Signature Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 70 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST FOR D.G SET


Contractor: M/s. Date:

Equipment make:

Equipment Model:

Equipment S. No:
S. No. Item Status Remarks
1. All body cover /electrical
insulation in sound condition
2. Electrical Cable without joint
3. Cable including welding and
ground cables with worn-out or
crack insulation
4. Condition of Welding Holder and
its insulation
5. Conditions of Electrical Switches
6. Earthing arrangement proper
7. Availability of proper face shield
and leather hand gloves for
welder
8. Other remarks

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for


use at

Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer

Name: Name :

Signature Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 71 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST FOR


PORTABLE GRINDING MACHINE/TOOL
Contractor: M/s. Date:

Equipment make:
Equipment Model:

Equipment S. No:
S. No. Item Status Remarks
1. Proper Wheel Guard Provided
2. All body covers/ electrical
insulation in sound conditions
3. Three core electrical cable
provided
4. Electrical plug top provided
5. Provision of earthing
6. Cable without joints and in sound
condition
7. Wheel RPM matches with
machine RPM
8. Availability of Face Shield &
Gloves for Grinder
9. Other Items, If any

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for


use

Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer

Name : Name :

Signature Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 72 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST FOR GAS CUTTING SET


Contractor: M/s. Date:

Equipment make:

Equipment Model:

Equipment S. No:
Item Status Remarks
Gas cylinders colour as per code
Flesh back arrester Provided
Cylinder valves are ISI marked
Valve key available
Both hoses free form joints, burns
& cracks
Colour of hoses proper:
Oxygen Black Acetylene: Red
Length of both hoses should be
equal
Proper goggles and leather hand
gloves available for use
Other remarks

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for use

Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer

Name : Name :

Signature Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 73 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY CHECK LIST


LIFTING TOOLS & TACKLES

Contractor: M/s. Date:

Equipment make:
Equipment Model:

Equipment S. No:
S. no. Item Status Remarks
1 Proper
& valid load test certificate available form
authorized reprehensive of chief inspector
of factories
2. Max. safe load displayed on equip. in kg
3. All guard such as guard over gears, rotating
shaft etc are in place
4. Wire rope without kinks/ loose or broken
strands / excessive wear.
5. Chain / hook without physical damage.
6. Date of last test done
7. Next Testing test done
8. Other remarks

Above portable electric grinder found ( ) suitable ( ) not suitable for use
Contractor Safety Engineer Contractor Site Engineer

Name: Name :

Signature Signature:

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 74 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

SAFETY INDUCTION FORMAT –WORKER


Date:

Contractor:

Induction given by:

Topics:
S. No Name of Designation Company Sex Date of Blood Gate pass Signature
worker birth group no

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 75 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX

DESCRIPTION
S. No. QUANTITY

1. Small size roller bandage 6pcs


2. Medium size roller bandage 6pcs
3. Large size roller bandage 6pcs
4. Large size burn dressing 40no.
5. Cotton wool 75gm
6. Antiseptic solution 100ml
7. Merbromin solution 20ml
8. Sal ammonia 1pair
9. Scissors 4no.
10. Adhesive plaster 1 spool
14. Eye pad 4no.
12. Tourniquet 1 dozen
13. Safety pins 100ml
14. Tinc. Lodie 100ml
15. Burnol 1bottel
16. Wash cup for washing eyes 1no.
17. Potassium per magnate 1 no.
18. Tincture benzoin 100ml
19. Traingular band aid 1no.
20. Band aid dressing 5no.
21. Iodex 1no.
22. Tongue depressor 1 No.
23. Boric acid powder 40gm
24. Sodium bicarbonate 20gm
25. Dressing power 10gm
26. Medicinal glass 1no.
27. Duster 1pcs
28. Soap 1pcs
29. Toothache solution 1 bottle
30. Eye ointment 1 bottle
31. Vicks 1 bottle
32. Forceps 1 no.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 76 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

33. Cotton book 1 no.


34. Note book 1 no.
35. Splints 4 no.
36. Lock 1 no.

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 77 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

CONTACT DURING EMERGENCY


CLIENT FIRE & SAFETY
CLIENT
EPI SITE OFFICE

HOSPITALS :
KGH PBX
ESI Hospital-
ESI Hospital- Industrial Estate

ESI Hospital- SAMPLE


Apollo Hospital
Seven hills
Care hospital
Ambulances:
Apollo
Lazarus hospital
Latha hospital
Blood banks
KGH
Rotary blood bank
AS raja hospital
Police control room 100
Emergency 108

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 78 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

CHECKLIST FOR SCAFFOLDINGS


Name of Contractor : _________________________ Job ___________________
Location: ___________________ Date: __________________

Sl. Description YES NO NA REMARKS/ACTION


No.
1 Whether work permit is obtained to take
up work at height above 2.0 Mtrs?
2 whether atmospheric condition is
"stormy" or "raining" and works at
heights have been permitted?
3 Whether steel pipes scaffoldings are used
for units / Offsite areas?
4 Whether scaffold construction is as per IS
specification with toe-board and hand-
rails (top-rail as well as mid-rail)?
5 Whether distance between two
successive up-rights are less than 2.5 Mts
(height of scaffold & load carrying
capacity governs the distance between
two uprights.
6 Whether all uprights are extended at
least 900mm above the top most working
platform (to enable fitting of handrails)?
7 Whether vertical distance of two
successive ledgers is satisfactory?
(varying between 1.3 Mtrs to 2.1 Mts )
8 Whether the peripheral areas of working
at height are cordoned-off? (for avoiding
accident to people arising out of dropped
/ deflected materials)
9 Whether platform is provided? Is it safely
approachable?
10 Whether end of scaffold platform / board
are extended beyond transoms? (125mm
to 150mm)
14 Whether CE / IS approved quality and
worthy conditioned safety harness (with

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 79 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

double lanyard & karabiners) are used


while working at heights?
12 Whether life line of safety harness is
anchored to an independent secured
support capable of withstanding load of a
falling person?
13 Whether the area around the scaffold is
cordoned off to prohibit the entry of
unauthorized person/vehicle?
14 Whether clamps used are of god
conditions, of adequate strength and free
from defects?
15 Whether ladder is placed at secured and
levelled surface?
16 whether water pass and oil-spills are
avoided around the scaffold structure?
17 Whether ladder is extended 1.5Mtrs
above the landing point at height?
18 Whether more than one access/egress
provided to the scaffold?
19 Whether ladder used are of adequate
length and
overlapping of short ladders avoided?
20 Whether metallic ladders are placed
much away from nearby electrical
transmission line?
21 Whether rungs of ladder are inspected
and found in good order?
22 Whether fall-arrests provided on both
the access/egress routes?
23 Whether diagonal (cross) bracings are
provided at regular interval on the
scaffold?
24 Whether working platform on the
scaffold has been made free from "holt:
or "gap"?
25 Whether tools or materials are removed
after completion of the day's job at
heights?
26 Whether a valid Permit for Work (PFW) is
obtained before taking up work over
asbestos or fragile roof?

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 80 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

27 Whether sufficient precaution is taken


while working on fragile roof?
28 Whether provision is made to arrange
duck ladder, crawling board for working
on fragile roof?
29 Whether scaffolding has been erected on
rigig/fir,/leveledsurfaces / ground?
Whether "foot-seals" or "base-plates" are
used beneath the up-rights (vertical steel
pipes)
30 Whether scaffold has been inspected by
qualified civil engineers prior to their
use?
31 Whether the scaffolding has been
designed for the load to be borne by the
same?
32 Whether the erection and dismantling of
the scaffolding is being done by trained
persons and under adequate
supervision?
33 Whether safety net with proper working
arrangement and life-line has been
provided?
34 Whether TAGS (Green for acceptable and
Red for
incomplete/unsafe scaffolds) are used on
scaffolds?
35 Whether sufficient illumination is
provided in and around the scaffold and
access?
36 Whether emergency rescue / response
arrangements are made in place

Checked & Revised by:-

Contractor’s PMC’s OWNER’s


Engineer Engineer Engineer

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 81 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

DAILY SAFETY CHECKING SHEET


Date : Location / site -
Name of the Site Engineer of EPI…………………………………………………………
Name of the Safety Engineer of EPI…………………………………………………………

Description of the job ( s ) planned on the Day :

Name of the Competent Electrician present at site ( Shift wise ) …………………………..

Use of PPE / Safety Equipment :


SI.No PPE Compliance SI.No PPE Compliance
1 Safety Helmet. 7 Safety Belt/Harnes.
2 Safety Shoes. 8 Fall Arrest System.
3 Hand Gloves. 9 Safety Net.
4 Dust Musk. 10 Life Line.
5 Safety Goggles. 14 Alu / Rope Ladder.
6 Face Shield. 12 Any Other Item.
( Item no. 1 & 2 are must for every body, Specify & Ensure use of other safety Equipment as per job
requirement.)

SAFE CONDITION NOTICED (BASED ON SITE VISIT)


SI.NO. Safe Condition Yes NO. Action
1 Access to work site/emergency escape clear.

2 Loose earth / Soil kept away from excavated


pit/slope/ladder provided
3 Electrical wire/Welding leads not lying entangled
on ground/Welding machine both accessible.
4 Elevated work platform/open ends are
protected.
5 Any other item.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Including Job Specific)

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 82 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

REMARKS : (IF ANY)

Name & Sign. Of the Safety Engineer. (EPI) Name & Sign. Of the Site Engineer. (EPI)

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 83 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

INSPECTION OF TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION


(CIVIL & STRCUTURAL WORKS)
Name of the Agency: Name of the Work:
Report No.:
Location/Area of Installation: Date:
Sl. Subject Observation Action
No. Taken
1 At this location the connections are routed through ELCB
or not?
2 ELCB sensitively maintained at 30MA or not? Is It verified
3 Are the ELCB’s Numbered and tested periodically and test
results recorded in a logbook monthly/countersigned by
competent person
4 Is earthing ensured at the source of power
5 Continuity and tightness of earth conductor being used at
this location
6 Is the main DB accessible smoothly? Is it protected from
sun/rain & water logging?
7 Is correct fuses/circuit breakers provided at main board
or sub-boards?
8 Covering of junction boxes, panels and other energized
wiring places checked? Mention status
9 Condition of cables checked at site? Mention status
10 Any improper jointing of cables/wires noticed at site?
What actions are taken?
14 Proper rated Basin socket / plug used for power
12 Is Single Line Diagram displayed?
13 Are sufficient Fire Protection Appliances kept in that
location?
14 Is Rubber mat provided in front of Switch Panel?
15 Is Shock Chart and Warning Sign board provided?
16 Any other observations

Signature:…………………. Signature:………………….

Name of licensed competent electrician:……………... Name of site Engineer…………..

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 84 | 86
ENGINEERING PROJECTS(INDIA)LTD FORMAT NO.
(A Govt. of India Enterprise) EPI/ENGG/PMD/001
ISSUE NO. 01, DATE: 02.06.14
Project ESHSE Management REV NO. 02 , DATE: 08.11.20
Strategies & Implementation Plan

MONTHLY WORKFORCE REPORT


(CIVIL & STRCUTURAL WORKS, )
NAME OF THE AGENCY: MONTH:
Name of the Work:
S.No. Date No. of No. of Total Strength Working Total Man Remarks
Staff Workmen Hours hours
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
14
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Signature of Site-in-charge

Reviewed by Approved by P a g e 85 | 86
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT
for proposed MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam,
Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
M/s. TATA Consulting Engineers Limited., Pune are associated in construction of MSME
buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.

The site for the proposed project is situated on northern and western side of road at
SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu. The site is almost
rectangular in shape and approximately measures 7.5acres. The site is open on all sides
and is undulating. The site is below the existing road level by about 1.5m Vegetation in
the form of grass, bushes and trees were observed at the site during the period of field
investigations. There is a water body existing on the western side of the site (adjacent to
site). There is a high tension line on the southern side of the site in east-west direction
(adjacent to site).

The proposed project comprises of MSME buildings comprising of Ground floor and 4/5
upper floors.

Geotechnical investigations have been undertaken at the site as per the scope of
investigations, stipulated by the client, which consisted of total Five boreholes down to
the required depth along with 3 electrical resistivity tests and 10 trial pits. The coordinates
of the test location are provided belwo:

Test Number Easting Northing


BH 1 382659 1426167
BH 2 382759 1426176
BH 3 382874 1426160
BH 4 382759 1426113
BH 5 382662 1426092
TP 1 382953 1426156

G(C)9289

Page 1 of 136
Test Number Easting Northing
TP 2 382916 1426094
TP 3 382892 1426123
TP 4 382836 1426103
TP 5 382791 1426144
TP 6 382672 1426060
TP 7 382677 1426136
TP 8 382693 1426197
TP 9 382825 1426201
TP 10 382925 1426180
ERT 1 382680 1426145
ERT 2 382802 1426122
ERT 3 382889 1426152

The soil strata consists of clay silt sand with gravels with varying proportions. The subsoil
strata is reflective of gradually improving conditions with upper layers indicating medium
to stiff consistency and indicating very dense conditions beyond 12m depth.

During the investigations on completion of boreholes, water table was allowed to stabilise
for 24hrs. Ground water table had been encountered between 7.5 and 12.5m depth in the
borehole during the period of field investigations.

In view of the observed subsoil strata conditions the proposed structure can be supported
on Isolated/strip foundations. The allowable bearing pressure at different depths for
different widths for various settlement are given below:

G(C)9289

Page 2 of 136
Net Allowable Bearing Pressure for
Depth of Foundation Settlement different foundation width (t/m²)
from E G L (m) (mm)
1 2 3 4 5 $6m
75 11 11.5 11.5 12 12.5 13
50 8.5 9 11 12 12.5 13
2
40 7 7 9 10 12 13.5
25 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5

75 11.5 12 12 12.5 13 14
50 9 10 11.5 13 13 14
3
40 8 8 11 12 13 14
25 4.5 5 5.5 6.5 8.5 10

75 14.5 15 15.5 16 16.5 16.5


50 11 12 12.5 13 14.5 16.5
4
40 9 9.5 12.5 13 14.5 16.5
25 5 6 7 7.5 9 11

75 16.5 17 17.5 18 18.5 19


50 12 13 13.5 14 16.5 19
5
40 10.5 11 13.5 14 16 19
25 6 6.5 8 8.5 10.5 12

75 18 18.5 19 19.5 20 21
50 13.5 14.5 15 16.5 18 21
6
40 12 13 14.5 16 17.5 21
25 7 8.5 9 9 12 13

G(C)9289

Page 3 of 136
If load transfer by structures is more than the bearing pressure recommended above; then
Pile foundation may be adopted. The Load Carrying Capacity of different diameter piles
is given below:

Effective Diameter Load Uplift Depth of Lateral


length of Pile of Pile Carrying Capacity Fixity (m) Capacity (t)
(m) (mm) Capacity (t) (t)
Free Fixed Free Fixed
head head head head

450 40 18 4.37 4.99 0.90 2.43


500 45 20 4.76 5.43 1.07 2.87
12
600 60 25 5.5 6.28 1.43 3.85
750 85 30 6.58 7.51 2.04 5.50
450 50 30 4.37 4.99 0.90 2.43
500 60 32 4.76 5.43 1.07 2.87
15
600 75 40 5.5 6.28 1.43 3.85
750 105 48 6.58 7.51 2.04 5.50
450 65 40 4.37 4.99 0.90 2.43
500 75 45 4.76 5.43 1.07 2.87
18
600 95 50 5.5 6.28 1.43 3.85
750 125 65 6.58 7.51 2.04 5.50

The excavated soil is fine grained and exhibits medium expansivity. It is therefore not
recommended for use as foundation backfill (refer para 7.10.1).
For excavation for the foundations, the excavation may be done with a slope of 1.5-
2vertical to 1horizontal upto a depth of 3m. Excavations beyond 3m should have suitable
benches as per IS 10386 (Part 8).
Stiff Tie-beams connecting the columns in both directions may be provided which will
render additional rigidity to the structure.
The site must have proper slopes and drainage system to drain out any pilferage of water/
rain water to avoid moisture water movement towards the foundation / underneath the

G(C)9289

Page 4 of 136
structures.
Is the site is being filled with external soil and for any filling; the filling may be done in
layers using non swelling soil. The filling may be done in layers of 25-30cm thick duly
compacted to >95% of modified proctor density.
It is suggested the load capacity of the pile be confirmed by a load test.
After reaching the required depth, care should be taken that the slush formed at the bottom
is minimum. The bentonite being used during piling should be as per IS 2911.

G(C)9289

Page 5 of 136
REPORT ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FOR

PROPOSED MSME BUILDINGS AT SIPCOT INDUSTRIAL PARK,

VALLAM, VADAGAL, KANCHIPURAM, TAMILNADU

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Overview

1.1.1 The geotechnical investigation has been done to ascertain the soil properties and to aid

the design of viable foundations for the proposed buildings.

1.1.2 M/s. TATA Consulting Engineers Limited., Pune are associated in construction of MSME

buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.

1.2 Authority

1.2.1 A comprehensive soil investigation programme has been conducted as per the

authorisation by M/s. TATA Consulting Engineers Limited, Pune vide their P.O.No.

3200003007/0 dated 11.03.2019.

2.0 PROJECT DETAILS

2.1 Site Location

2.1.1 The site for the proposed project is situated on northern and western side of road at

SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu. The key map

showing the location of the site is given in fig. 1.

2.2 Site Layout and Topography

2.2.1 The site is almost rectangular in shape and approximately measures 7.5acres. The site is

open on all sides and is undulating. The site is below the existing road level by about

1.5m Vegetation in the form of grass, bushes and trees were observed at the site during

the period of field investigations. There is a water body existing on the western side of the

G(C)9289

Page 6 of 136
site (adjacent to site). There is a high tension line on the southern side of the site in east-

west direction (adjacent to site).

2.2.2 The colour of the exposed soil surface is Brownish red.

2.3 Geology

2.3.1 The proposed site is located in the south eastern part of India and in northern part of

Tamil Nadu. It is bounded by Bay of Bengal on the east, Andhra Pradesh state in the north

and Tamil Nadu state in the west and south.

2.3.2 The area of tamilnadu have extensive khondalites, charnockites and migmatitic rocks are

traced. The eastern coastal tract is characterized by Phanerozoic sedimentary cover. The

sedimentary deposits were deposited at various stages ranging from the Recent to Upper

Gondwana.

2.3.3 The Alluvium consists of sand, silts and clays. The thickness of alluvium varies from

place to place. The tertiary sandstones are reddish brown to greyish white and white in

colour. The sandstones are available above the eroded Gondwana formations and or

overlain by river alluvium. This formation is of terrestrial origin. The Gondwana deposit

is located in a small area on the north western corner south of the tertiary formation. In

the coastal Gondwana deposit, the presence of plant fossils and marine incursion during

the laying down of the sediments.

2.3.4 Kanchipuram area consists of soil underlayed by crystalline hard rocks with varying depth

to the basement rocks (mostly charnockite with some gneissic/granite zones). Lineament

features like fractures, joints, faults, dykes are common in the region. The predominant

geomorphological features that are found in this area are buried pediment, inselbergs,

residual hills and mud flats. The general sequence of lithounits in this area comprises

G(C)9289

Page 7 of 136
thick layer of soil, weathered charnockite and the basement rock.

2.4 The Structure

2.4.1 As per the client’s information, the proposed project comprises of MSME buildings

comprising of Ground floor and 4/5 upper floors.

2.5 Seismic Zone

2.5.1 Site for the proposed project is situated at Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram near Chennai

which falls under Seismic Zone III as per IS 1893 (Part 1) - 2016.

2.6 Geographical Information

2.6.1 The proposed site lies in:

a) Latitude : 12<53'

b) Longitude : 79<55'

3.0 OBJECT OF INVESTIGATIONS

3.1 For designing the foundation system of the proposed structures, the following data are

required:

a) Type of foundation system.

b) Depth below the ground level at which the foundation system is to be laid.

c) Allowable bearing pressure on the foundations levels.

3.2 To determine above factors, the following information would be required:

a) The sub soil profile indicating thickness of the various soil strata, to a depth down

to the influence zone below the foundations.

b) Engineering properties of the soil strata at various levels.

c) Physical characteristics of the soil strata.

d) Variation of the strength of the strata with depth.

G(C)9289

Page 8 of 136
3.3 The object of conducting field and laboratory investigations and analysis is to get data for

the parameters mentioned in 3.2 and providing the recommendations.

4.0 SCOPE OF INVESTIGATIONS

4.1 Scope of investigations as given by the client in the work order:

a) Sinking a total of 5 boreholes down to 25m depth or Refusal/rock strata (where

N>100) and further drilling in refusal/rock strata by minimum 7.5m (i,e 5 SPT

with N>100 spaced at 1.5m interval), as required by the client.

b) Conducting standard penetration tests at 1.5m intervals in the boreholes.

c) Recovering undisturbed soil samples from various levels of the sub soil strata.

d) Recording ground water table levels, if met with.

e) Conducting 3 electrical resistivity tests at specified locations.

f) Excavating 10 trial pits of at specified locations.

g) Conducting permeability tests at 3 locations.

h) Collecting samples for 10 laboratory CBR tests at the specified locations.

i) Conducting relevant laboratory tests on soil samples and water samples were

recovered/collected.

j) Preparation and submission of a technical report containing the details of the tests

carried out, their analysis and recommendations regarding the foundation system

to be adopted. Two copies of the report are to be submitted.

5.0 FIELD INVESTIGATIONS

5.1 General Details

5.1.1 Weather Conditions

Weather was dry and clear during field investigations which was carried out on second

G(C)9289

Page 9 of 136
week of February 2019.

5.1.2 Locations of Tests

5.1.2.1 The location of the boreholes were shown at site by the client. A Schematic site plan

showing the location of the test points marked by the client is given in fig. 1.

5.1.2.2 Few photographs taken during the test are provided in fig 23 to 36.

5.2 Boreholes

5.2.1 The boreholes were progressed by mechanically operated rotary core drill method using

calyx as per IS 1892 - 1979.

5.2.2 The boreholes were terminated after drilling a minimum of 7.5m (i,e 5 SPT in N>100 at

1.5m intervals) in refusal/rock strata. The refusal strata encountered is in the form of Hard

clay. The N value in this strata is >100. The termination depth of boreholes and depth of

water table encountered in the boreholes during the period of field investigations are given

in the following table.

Co-ordinates Termination Depth of water


BH
depth from table from
No Easting Northing Existing G L (m) Existing G L (m)
1 382659 1426167 25.5 7.5
2 382759 1426176 25.5 11.5
3 382874 1426160 19.5 12.5
4 382759 1426113 19.5 11
5 382662 1426092 21.0 8

5.2.3 Standard penetration tests were conducted at 1.5m intervals. Disturbed soil samples

recovered from split spoon samples were packed in polythene bags, labelled and retained

for identification purposes.

5.2.4 Undisturbed soil samples were recovered by thin walled tubes conforming to IS 2132.

G(C)9289

10

Page 10 of 136
These tubes had an area ratio of less than 10-15%. The diameter of soil samples were

90mm and its length was 45cm. The ends of sample tubes were sealed by wax to prevent

loss/ ingress of moisture and labelled.

5.3 Ground water table

5.3.1 Ground water table had been encountered between 7.5 and 12.5m depth in the borehole

during the period of field investigations.

5.4 Electrical Resistivity Tests

5.4.1 Electrical resistivity tests (ERT1 to ERT3) had been carried out at the specified locations.

The tests have been conducted using Wenners' four electrode method as per IS : 3043.

The coordinates of the tests are given below:

Co-ordinates
ERT No
Easting Northing
1 382680 1426145
2 382802 1426122
3 382889 1426152

5.4.2 In this test, four electrodes had been driven into the ground surface along a straight line

at equal intervals/ spacings. The tests involves the passing of a current through the outer

two electrodes called the current electrodes and the measurement of the voltage difference

between the two inner electrodes called the potential electrodes. The ratio of the voltage

difference measured to the current passed gives the resistance. An electrical megger had

been used to determine the resistance directly, at the site. The resistance had been so

determined for various electrode spacings.

5.4.3 In the present case, the depth of electrodes had been maintained at 20cms. The spacings

of electrodes adopted had been 1.5, 3, 6, 9 and 12m.

G(C)9289

11

Page 11 of 136
5.4.4 The above procedure had been repeated for eight different directions at every selected

location, as per the standard procedure.

5.4.5 The electrical resistivity of the soil which is a function of the resistance determined is

calculated for each electrode spacing used. A plot of electrical resistivity vs distance is

then prepared which invariably indicates an average constant value of the electrical

resistivity at larger electrode spacings. This average constant value of the electrical

resistivity is taken as the resistivity for that direction.

5.4.6 The electrical resistivity so determined for each direction is plotted on a polar plot to

obtain a closed curve. The representative electrical resistivity for the test location is then

determined as the radius of the circle having an area equivalent to the enclosed area within

the closed curve of the polar plot.

5.4.7 The electrical resistivity of the soil/rock depends on the density, water content, grain size

distribution etc. of the soil and mineral composition and grain structure of the parent rock.

5.5 Trial Pits

5.5.1 Three trial pit were excavated at the specified locations. The coordinates of the tests are

given below:

Co-ordinates
TP No
Easting Northing
1 382953 1426156
2 382916 1426094
3 382892 1426123
4 382836 1426103
5 382791 1426144
6 382672 1426060

G(C)9289

12

Page 12 of 136
Co-ordinates
TP No
Easting Northing
7 382677 1426136
8 382693 1426197
9 382825 1426201
10 382925 1426180

5.5.2 The trial pit were of 1.5 x1.5m x3m.

5.5.3 Samples were collected at regular depth from the pits that were excavated.

5.6 Field Permeability Tests

5.6.1 Field permeability tests had been conducted as per IS: 5529 (Part I) - 1985 by the open

ended cased borehole method. The permeability tests had been conducted by falling head

method in the drilled boreholes.

5.6.2 In this method, the borehole had been drilled down to the level of 3m at which test had

been performed. The casing had been simultaneously sunk down to the full drilled depth

of the borehole as the drilling or boring of the borehole was in progress. After the required

level had been reached, the borehole had been properly cleaned.

5.6.3 After the borehole had been cleaned, the borehole had been filled with water up to a level

and the fall in level against time had been recorded.

6.0 LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS

6.1 The disturbed and undisturbed soil samples brought to the laboratory were used for the

tests, as appropriate.

6.2 The soil samples were subjected to various tests to determine the following properties

a) Type of soil and its gradation

b) Consistency limits

G(C)9289

13

Page 13 of 136
c) Natural density

d) Natural water content

e) Shear strength properties

f) Swell Pressure

g) Consolidation properties

h) Maximum dry density

i) Lab CBR

j) Chemical properties of soil and water

6.3 In order to determine the above properties listed in 6.2, the following tests were

conducted.

a) Sieve analysis on the coarse grained soil fraction

b) Hydrometer analysis on the fine grained soil fraction

c) Liquid and plastic limits

d) Natural Density and Water Content tests

e) Triaxial compression tests

f) Specific Gravity

g) Free Swell Index tests

h) Swell Pressure tests

i) Consolidation tests

j) Modified proctor density tests

k) Lab CBR Tests

l) Chemical analysis of soil and water

G(C)9289

14

Page 14 of 136
7.0 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION AND ANALYSIS

7.1 Presentation of Results

7.1.1 The results of borehole investigations and of the laboratory investigations conducted on

the soil samples collected from the boreholes have been presented in the form of tables.

Table No.1 to 5 give the details of borehole no 1 to 5 respectively.

7.1.2 The soil profile tables indicate the following:

a) Standard Penetration Test Values (i.e. N- values observed) at various depths

b) Soil description identifying the type of soil

c) Core recovery and RQD at various depths

d) Grain size analysis indicating composition of sub soil

e) Atterberg limits

f) In-situ bulk density and Water content

g) Triaxial compression tests

7.2 Analysis of Soil Profile

7.2.1 A perusal of the data presented in the soil profile tables indicate the presence of the

following strata.

a) Stratum I : Brownish grey sandy silty clay

b) Stratum II : Hard clay

7.2.2 The thicknesses in each borehole of each strata described in 7.2.1 is given in the table

below:

depth (m) : from - to


BH. NO.
Stratum I Stratum II
1 0.0 - 15 15 - 25.5
2 0.0 - 13.5 13.5 - 25.5

G(C)9289

15

Page 15 of 136
depth (m) : from - to
BH. NO.
Stratum I Stratum II
3 0.0 - 13.5 13.5 - 19.5
4 0.0 - 13.5 13.5 - 19.5
5 0.0 - 13.5 13.5 - 21

7.3 Soil Composition

7.3.1 The grain size distribution of the soil samples at various depths, as determined in the

laboratory have been presented in the form of grain size analysis curves, as fig. 3, 3a to

3d and in tables below them.

7.3.2 The variations in the grain size distribution - strata wise across the boreholes are as

follows:

a) Stratum I : Brownish grey sandy silty clay

BH NO. Gravel (%) Sand (%) Silt (%) Clay (%)


1 0 16 - 22 32 - 36 41 - 52
2 0 15 - 23 30 - 37 40 - 55
3 0 17 - 22 33 - 36 42 - 50
4 0 16 - 25 30 - 37 38 - 54
5 0 14 - 23 29 - 37 40 - 57

b) Stratum II : Hard clay

BH NO. Gravel (%) Sand (%) Silt (%) Clay (%)


1 0 21 - 25 33 - 37 38 - 46
2 0 20 - 27 32 - 35 38 - 46
3 0 20 - 26 35 - 37 37 - 45
4 0 22 - 25 34 - 36 39 - 44
5 0 22 - 27 33 - 36 37 - 45

G(C)9289

16

Page 16 of 136
7.3.3 The above results indicate that :

a) Stratum I consists of about 14 - 23% of sand, 29 - 37% silt and 38 - 57% of clay.

b) Stratum II consists of about 20 - 27% of sand, 33 - 37% silt and 37 - 46% of clay.

7.4 In-situ Bulk Density, Water Content and Dry density

7.4.1 The In-situ bulk density of the sub soil stratum varies between 1.77 and 1.94g/cm3, water

content varies between 11.46 and 22.16% and In-situ dry density of the sub soil stratum

varies between 1.58 and 1.67g/cm3.

BH Depth Water In-situ Bulk Dry Density


No (m) Content (%) Density (g/cm3) (g/cm3)
2 11.87 1.8 1.61
4 11.53 1.82 1.63
1
7 19.63 1.9 1.59
10 22.16 1.93 1.58
2 12.26 1.78 1.59
4 11.79 1.81 1.62
2
6 13.23 1.89 1.67
10 22.01 1.94 1.59
2 11.96 1.79 1.6
3 4 11.46 1.83 1.64
7 15.36 1.88 1.63
2 12.19 1.77 1.58
4 4 11.2 1.83 1.65
7 17.09 1.88 1.61
2 11.96 1.77 1.58
5 4 12.24 1.8 1.6
7 15.84 1.86 1.61

7.5 Atterberg Limits:

7.5.1 The Atterberg Limits in Stratum I (Brownish grey sandy silty clay) are given below:

G(C)9289

17

Page 17 of 136
BH No Liquid Limit (%) Plastic Limit (%) Plasticity Index (%)
1 47 - 59 20 - 26 27 - 33
2 46 - 62 20 - 27 26 - 35
3 50 - 59 21 - 23 29 - 36
4 45 - 61 19 - 27 26 - 34
5 47 - 66 20 - 28 27 - 38

7.5.2 The Atterberg Limits in Stratum II (Hard clay) are given below:

BH No Liquid Limit (%) Plastic Limit (%) Plasticity Index (%)


1 45 - 53 20 - 23 25 - 30
2 44 - 51 19 - 23 25 - 28
3 43 - 52 18 - 22 25 - 30
4 46 - 50 20 - 22 26 - 28
5 42 - 52 18 - 22 24 - 30

7.6 Standard Penetration Tests

7.6.1 Standard Penetration Test values (N-values observed) are presented in the soil profile

table no 1 to 5. The curve showing relation N - values (observed) vs depth is shown in fig.

4. The N values indicate the soil is in a soft / stiff state.

7.7 Shear Test Results

7.7.1 The cohesion obtained from consolidated drained triaxial compression test at varies

between 0.23 to 0.33kg/cm² and the angle of shearing resistance k of the soil varies

between 13< & 21<.

7.8 Specific Gravity

7.8.1 The specific gravity of the soil particles are given below:

G(C)9289

18

Page 18 of 136
Specific Gravity at Depth (m)
BH NO
1.5 3
1 2.55 2.56
2 2.54 2.56
3 2.56 2.57
4 2.54 2.55
5 2.54 2.56

7.9 Free Swell Index

7.9.1 The free swell index of the soil particles are given below:

Free Swell Index (%) at depth (m)


BH NO
1.5 3
1 58.4 51.7
2 59.2 53.6
3 54.1 47.6
4 60.4 53.9
5 62.4 54.1

7.9.2 The above results indicate that the soil is medium swelling nature. Hence, the excavated

soil cannot be used for backfilling purposes.

7.10 Swell Pressure

7.10.1 The results of swell pressure tests are given below:

Swelling Pressure (kg/cm²)


BH No Depth (m)
At Dry State At Natural Water Content
2 0.84 0.79
1 4 0.77 0.72
7 0.55 0.46

G(C)9289

19

Page 19 of 136
Swelling Pressure (kg/cm²)
BH No Depth (m)
At Dry State At Natural Water Content
10 0.33 0.25
2 0.89 0.82
4 0.83 0.76
2
7 0.51 0.48
10 0.31 0.24
2 0.86 0.77
3 4 0.79 0.71
7 0.53 0.45
2 0.89 0.81
4 4 0.82 0.73
7 0.41 0.39
2 0.92 0.83
5 4 0.84 0.78
7 0.63 0.52

7.11 Consolidation Tests

7.11.1 The results of consolidation tests are given below:

BH No Depth (m) Cc av (cm²/kg) mv (cm²/kg)


2 0.221 0.048 0.0252
4 0.197 0.053 0.0234
1
7 0.099 0.022 0.0140
10 0.072 0.016 0.0107
2 0.227 0.049 0.0256
4 0.176 0.038 0.0216
2
7 0.103 0.022 0.0144
10 0.076 0.017 0.0112
3 2 0.224 0.049 0.0254

G(C)9289

20

Page 20 of 136
BH No Depth (m) Cc av (cm²/kg) mv (cm²/kg)
4 0.183 0.048 0.0222
7 0.109 0.024 0.0151
2 0.226 0.049 0.0256
4 4 0.185 0.040 0.0224
7 0.091 0.020 0.0130
2 0.234 0.051 0.0262
5 4 0.181 0.039 0.0220
7 0.082 0.018 0.0120

7.11.2 Graph of e log p curve is given in fig 6 to 22, settlement of square root of time is given

in fig 6a to 22a and e vs applied pressure in normal scale is given in fig 6b to 22b.

7.12 Compiled Soil Profile

7.12.1 An overview of the results and their analysis has been presented in the form of soil profile

in fig. 2.

7.13 Chemical analysis of water

7.13.1 The results of chemical analysis of water are given in Appendix B.

7.13.2 Presently the ground water samples can be used for construction purpose as per IS 456-

2000.

7.14 Chemical Analysis of Soil

7.14.1 The results of chemical analysis of soil are given in Appendix C.

7.14.2 As the sulphate content is less than 0.2% Ordinary Portland Cement may be used for

construction purposes as per IS 456-2000.

7.15 Electrical Resistivity Tests

7.15.1 The results of the Electrical Resistivity Tests (ERT1 to ERT3 ) has been analysed as given

below.

G(C)9289

21

Page 21 of 136
7.15.2 The electrical resistivity is calculated using the following expression :

  2  S  R

where D = resistivity of the soil in S-m

S = spacing of electrodes in m

R = measured resistance or megger reading in S

7.15.3 The polar plot of the electrical resistivity vs measured in eight directions have been given

in figs. 5, 5a and 5b.

7.15.4 The resistivity measured (in ohm) at various spacings are given in Appendix D.

7.15.5 The values of electrical resistivity obtained from the polar plot are given below :

Test Location Electrical Resistivity (S-m)


ERT1 39
ERT 2 48.78
ERT 3 37.63

7.15.6 The above soil resistivity ranges between 25-50ohm-m. Hence, the soil is moderately

corrosive as per IS 3043-1987 (Reprint 2007 amendment No 1).

7.16 Lab CBR Tests

7.16.1 Laboratory CBR tests were conducted on the soil samples (about 30-50cm below the

ground level) collected from the site and conducted at maximum dry density obtained

from Modified Proctor density. The CBR tests were conducted under soaked state with

a surcharge weight of 5, 10 and 12.5kg. The results of tests are given below.

G(C)9289

22

Page 22 of 136
% CBR for Penetration with the
Modified Proctor Density surcharge weight of
test
Location
5kg 10kg 12.5kg

Maximum Optimum
Dry Moisture 2.5 5.0 2.5 5.0 2.5 5.0
Density Content mm mm mm mm mm mm
(g/cm3) (%)

1 1.72 15 2.7 3.2 3.1 3.8 3.6 4.3

2 1.70 16 2.4 2.9 2.8 3.3 3.1 4.0

3 1.75 13 3.4 3.9 3.8 4.4 4.2 4.9

4 1.74 14 3.3 3.9 3.9 4.5 4.4 5.2

5 1.72 15 2.8 3.3 3.2 3.9 3.5 4.4

6 1.73 15 2.6 3.1 3.4 4.1 3.9 4.8

7 1.72 15 2.8 3.2 3.1 3.7 3.7 4.4

8 1.71 16 2.5 3.0 2.8 3.2 3.2 3.9

9 1.72 15 2.7 3.3 3.2 3.8 3.4 4.3

10 1.72 16 2.7 3.2 3.3 3.9 3.5 4.2

7.17 Trial Pits

7.17.1 Samples were collected form regular depths in the excavated trial pits. The laboratory test

results are given in tables 6 to 15.

7.18 Field Permeability Tests

7.18.1 The permeability by falling head method is obtained from the following relation

.r H
k  log e 1
55. (t 2  t 1) H2

k = coefficient of permeability(cm/s)

G(C)9289

23

Page 23 of 136
H1 = Piezometric head at time t1

H2 = Piezometric head at time t2

r = Inside radius of casing (cm)

7.18.2 The coefficient of permeability ‘k’ determined at 3m depths at different boreholes has

been given hereunder.

Borehole No Permeability (cm/sec)


1 1.16 x 10-7
3 5.38 x 10-8
5 8.54 x 10-8

7.19 Liquefaction

7.19.1 Liquefaction is a condition in sandy soil strata which occurs when the inherent shear

strength in the strata is reduced and the strata behaves like a liquid. This condition arises

mainly when the strata is subjected to accelerations during vibrations. Under vibrations,

the individual particles loose contact with each other and reach a weightless (Levitation)

state. Consequently, the shear strength of the strata reduces. When the strata is saturated,

the pore water pressure increases due to the acceleration and reduces the effective shear

strength. The magnitude of reduction in both cases depends upon the intensity of

acceleration and also on the insitu density. The above phenomena occur during

earthquakes in sandy soils especially poorly graded sandy soils.

7.19.2 Normally, if the fines content (silt and clay fraction) of the soil is more than 35%,

liquefaction does not occur when the N values are more than 15.

7.19.3 At the present site, the corrected N values in the soil strata are generally in excess of 15

except in a limited layer above 4.5m.

G(C)9289

24

Page 24 of 136
7.19.4 Such subsoil conditions are generally considered to be not susceptible to liquefaction.

7.19.5 Hence, the soil at the present site is not susceptible to liquefaction.

8.0 DESIGN CRITERIA - A DISCUSSION

8.1 Primary Parameters

8.1.1 The parameters required for the design of foundation system for the proposed structure

are:

a) Type of foundation to be adopted

b) Depth at which the foundations have to be laid/piles have to be terminated.

c) Allowable bearing pressure on the soil at the foundation level/load carrying

capacity of piles.

8.1.2 On the basis of the analysis of the results of investigations, the required design parameters

have been arrived at and these are given in paras 8.2 to 8.4.

8.2 Type of Foundations

8.2.1 The type of foundation depends on the following:

a) Sub soil conditions

b) Type of structure

c) Configuration at loading points

d) Loading intensity on each sub-structure/structural element.

8.2.2 As per the client’s information, the proposed project comprises of MSME buildings

comprising of Ground floor and 4/5 upper floors.

8.2.3 For the above conditions, Isolated/Strip/Raft foundations can be adopted for the proposed

projects. If load transfer by structures is more than the bearing pressure recommended;

then Pile foundation may be adopted.

G(C)9289

25

Page 25 of 136
8.3 Isolated/Strip/Raft Foundations

8.3.1 Depth of Foundation

8.3.1.1 The depth at which foundations should be laid will be governed by the following criteria.

a) There should be sufficient thickness of soil above the footings/foundations so that

they are neither exposed or undermined by natural/manmade forces in the future.

b) There should be sufficient thickness of soil above the footing/foundations so that

the bearing capacity of the soil can be fully mobilised.

c) Soil below the level of footings/foundations should have the requisite strength to

support the anticipated bearing pressures on the foundations without allowing the

settlement of footings/foundations to exceed the acceptable limits.

d) Requirements of the type of structure (MSME buildings comprising of Ground

floor and 4/5 upper floors.).

8.3.2 Net allowable bearing pressure at 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6m depth from exising ground level are

provided.

8.3.3 Allowable Bearing Pressure

8.3.3.1 An allowable settlement of 25/40/50/75mm has been considered to evaluate the allowable

bearing pressure for Isolated/Strip/Raft foundations.

8.3.3.2 Allowable bearing pressure has been evaluated by:

a) Shear failure criteria taking the average soil data

b) Settlement criteria taking consolidation test values

8.3.3.3 A water table correction factor of 0.5 has been considered.

8.3.3.4 Sample calculation for bearing pressure is given in Appendix A.

8.3.3.5 The allowable bearing pressure at different depth for various widths and settlements are

G(C)9289

26

Page 26 of 136
given in the para 9.1.2.c.

8.4 Pile Foundations

8.4.1 Type of Piles

8.4.1.1 The piles may be bored cast insitu piles. The boring may be done using augering (using

hydraulic feed) / direct mud circulation method.

8.4.2 Load Carrying Capacity

8.4.2.1 The load carrying capacity of different diameter piles are given in para 9.1.3.b.

8.4.2.2 As per Is 2911-2010, if L<2T; then the piles considered as short piles. The stiffness

factor (T) for various pile diameters vary between 2.63 to 3.96 and minimum length

of piles is 12 to 18m. Hence, the piles will primarily behave like long piles.

8.4.2.3 Sample calculation for pile capacities are given in Appendix A.

9.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

9.1.1 Type of Foundations : Isolated/Strip/Raft OR Pile

9.1.2 Isolated/Strip foundations

a) Type of Foundations : Isolated/strip

b) Minimum Depth of foundations: 2m from the existing ground level

c) Allowable bearing pressure : for different depth and widths are given

below

Net Allowable Bearing Pressure for


Depth of Foundation Settlement different foundation width (t/m²)
from E G L (m) (mm)
1 2 3 4 5 $6m
75 11 11.5 11.5 12 12.5 13
50 8.5 9 11 12 12.5 13
2
40 7 7 9 10 12 13.5
25 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5

G(C)9289

27

Page 27 of 136
Net Allowable Bearing Pressure for
Depth of Foundation Settlement different foundation width (t/m²)
from E G L (m) (mm)
1 2 3 4 5 $6m
75 11.5 12 12 12.5 13 14
50 9 10 11.5 13 13 14
3
40 8 8 11 12 13 14
25 4.5 5 5.5 6.5 8.5 10

75 14.5 15 15.5 16 16.5 16.5


50 11 12 12.5 13 14.5 16.5
4
40 9 9.5 12.5 13 14.5 16.5
25 5 6 7 7.5 9 11

75 16.5 17 17.5 18 18.5 19


50 12 13 13.5 14 16.5 19
5
40 10.5 11 13.5 14 16 19
25 6 6.5 8 8.5 10.5 12

75 18 18.5 19 19.5 20 21
50 13.5 14.5 15 16.5 18 21
6
40 12 13 14.5 16 17.5 21
25 7 8.5 9 9 12 13

9.1.3 Pile Foundations

a) Load carrying capacity : of different diameter piles at various termination

depths are given below:

Effective Diameter Load Uplift Depth of Lateral


length of Pile of Pile Carrying Capacity Fixity (m) Capacity (t)
(m) (mm) Capacity (t) (t)
Free Fixed Free Fixed
head head head head

450 40 18 4.37 4.99 0.9 2.4


12
500 45 20 4.76 5.43 1.05 2.85

G(C)9289

28

Page 28 of 136
Effective Diameter Load Uplift Depth of Lateral
length of Pile of Pile Carrying Capacity Fixity (m) Capacity (t)
(m) (mm) Capacity (t) (t)
Free Fixed Free Fixed
head head head head

600 60 25 5.5 6.28 1.45 3.85


750 85 30 6.58 7.51 2.05 5.5
450 50 30 4.37 4.99 0.9 2.4
500 60 32 4.76 5.43 1.05 2.85
15
600 75 40 5.5 6.28 1.45 3.85
750 105 48 6.58 7.51 2.05 5.5
450 65 40 4.37 4.99 0.9 2.4
500 75 45 4.76 5.43 1.05 2.85
18
600 95 50 5.5 6.28 1.45 3.85
750 125 65 6.58 7.51 2.05 5.5

9.2 Modulus of sub-grade reaction can be computed using the relationship

Allowable Modulus = Allowable Bearing pressure / Corresponding settlement

Factor of safety (multiplier) can be taken as 2.5 for computing ultimate modulus

9.3 Note

9.3.1 The recommendations given in this report have been arrived at on the basis of design

parameters which have been judiciously adopted by giving due consideration to the results

of field and laboratory investigations as well as NAGADI’s experience of over four

decades in working in various types of soil and rock conditions all over India.

10.0 CONSTRUCTION ADVISORY

10.1 The soil of each strata has been described with name, colour etc. During excavation

any variation in the nature of the soil and its condition from those given in this Report

should be noted and appropriate action should be taken.

10.2 The excavated soil is fine grained and exhibits medium expansivity. It is therefore not

G(C)9289

29

Page 29 of 136
recommended for use as foundation backfill (refer para 7.10.1).

10.3 For excavation for the foundations, the excavation may be done with a slope of 1.5-

2vertical to 1horizontal upto a depth of 3m. Excavations beyond 3m should have suitable

benches as per IS 10386 (Part 8).

10.4 Stiff Tie-beams connecting the columns in both directions may be provided which will

render additional rigidity to the structure.

10.5 The site must have proper slopes and drainage system to drain out any pilferage of water/

rain water to avoid moisture water movement towards the foundation / underneath the

structures.

10.6 Is the site is being filled with external soil and for any filling; the filling may be done in

layers using non swelling soil. The filling may be done in layers of 25-30cm thick duly

compacted to >95% of modified proctor density.

10.7 It is suggested the load capacity of the pile be confirmed by a load test.

10.8 After reaching the required depth, care should be taken that the slush formed at the

bottom is minimum. The bentonite being used during piling should be as per IS 2911.

11.0 REFERENCES

11.1 A list of IS codes referred for providing the recommendations and that which might be

required to implement the same has been given in Appendix E.

12.0 LIMITATIONS

12.1 This Geotechnical investigation has been carried out at locations in the site chosen by

the client as representing the entire site. The recommendations provided in this Report

are hence valid only for those test locations. However, if there is any change in sub-

soil conditions and properties at places between or beyond the chosen test locations,

Nagadi may be contacted for further actions. Fresh investigations will have to be

G(C)9289

30

Page 30 of 136
carried out at such locations.

M L SHANKAR

For NAGADI CONSULTANTS PVT. LTD.

G(C)9289

31

Page 31 of 136
Appendix A
ANALYSIS FOR ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE
Data
(i) Soil Properties :
c (kg/cm2) = 0.33 N = 13< ( (g/cm3) = 1.77
(ii) Depth of Foundation, D (m) = 200
(iii) Allowable Settlement, s (mm) = 75/50/40/25

Shear Failure Criterion


Nc = 9.80 Nq = 3.26 N( = 1.96 Rw = 0.5 Rw’ = 0.5
1
qs 
3
 
c  N c   . D  N q  R w  0.5    B  N   R' w   . D

B (m) 1 2 3 4 5 $6m
qs (t/m2) 11.2 11.5 11.8 12.1 12.4 13.0
From Settlement Criterion
as per IS 6403 q = 0.554 (N-3) {B+0.3/2B}²x Rw’ for 40mm settlement
N(Corrected Weighted) 9 11 14 16 19 21
B (m) 1 2 3 4 5 $6m
2
qs (t/m ) 7.01 7.3 9.14 10.3 12.4 13.7
The lower of the above must be adopted:

Settlement Adopt Allowable Bearing Pressure for different


(mm) foundation width (t/m²)
1 2 3 4 5 $6m
75 11 11.5 11.5 12 12.5 13
50 8.5 9 11 12 12.5 13
40 7 7 9 10 12 13.5

25 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5

G(C)9289

32

Page 32 of 136
SETTLEMENT CALCULATION BASED ON CONSOLIDATION TEST
The total settlement of the foundation due to underlying compressible stratum (as Is 8009) is
given by:
S = {Cc / (1 + eo)} H. log10 {(Po +> P) /Po }
Where:
S = Settlement
Cc = Compression index
H = Thickness of compressible strata
Po = Original intensity of pressure acting at mid height of compressible stratum
>P = Increment in pressure due to the additional load imposed through
Foundation
eo = Original Void Ratio
Data
Depth of foundation = 200cm
Dimension of footing (assumed) = 200 x 200cm
Bulk density = 1.86gm/cc
Compression index Cc = 0.143
Initial void ratio eo = 0.57
Compressible strata (H) = 300cms
Po (1.8 x 350) = 0.459g/cm2
>P = {(qa (B x L)}/{(B+Z)(L+Z)}
Where:
qa = Allowable bearing pressure = 4.5t/m² = 0.45kg/cm²
B&L = Dimension of footing = 200 x 200cm
Z = depth below foundation level of mid height of compressible
stratum = 350cm
>P = 0.1469g/cm2
substituting the values in the above equation, we get
S = 32.92cm

Applying depth correction factor =D/%LB, which is 0.73

we get S = 32.92 x 0.73 = 2.403cm say 24mm

Therefore, The calculated settlement for an allowable bearing pressure of 4.5t/m² is about
24mm which is less than 25mm. Hence, Safe.

G(C)9289

33

Page 33 of 136
CALCULATION FOR LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF PILE

Typical calculations for the pile capacity has been given hereunder for a pile of diameter 500mm.
For piles of other diameters, a similar procedure has been used to arrive at the recommended pile
capacities.
As per IS 2911 (Part 1/Sec 2) the Ultimate Pile Capacity is given by
Qu = End bearing + Skin friction = Ap Nc Cp + 3 " C As
where Ap = area of pile = 0.1953 m²
Nc = bearing capacity factor = 9
Cp = average cohesion at pile tip = 3kg/cm²
"= Adhesion factor in ith layer depending on the consistency of soil = 1upto 10m
depth, 0.435 upto 13m depth and 0.25 upto 16m depth
C= average cohesion for the ith layer = 0.3kg/cm² upto 10m depth, 1kg/cm² upto 13m
depth and 3kg/cm² upto 16m depth
As = surface area of pile in the ith layer = 14.139m² upto 10m depth (afer deducting 1m
as pile cap), 4.713m² upto 13m depth and 4.713m² upto 16m depth
substituting the values in the equation, we get
Qu = 53.02 + 42.42 + 20.03 + 35.35
= 150.82t
considering a FOS of 2.5
Qs = Qu / FOS = 150.82/2.5 = 60.33t
Therefore Adopt Qs = 60t

Uplift Capacity
Uplift Capacity is skin friction with a Factor of safety
Skin friction = 42.42 + 20.03 + 35.35
= 97.79t
considering a FOS of 3 we get
Uplift Capacity = 97.97/3 = 32.65t
Therefore adopt 30t
LATERAL PILE LOAD CAPACITY

G(C)9289

34

Page 34 of 136
A.1 Methodology
A.1.1 A typical calculation for the lateral pile load capacity has been given hereunder for a pile
of diameter ‘d’ = 500mm.
A.1.2 For determining the lateral pile load capacity, the depth of fixity of the piles or in other
words, the equivalent cantilever length of the pile, has to be first determined. The depth
of fixity is determined based on the modulus of horizontal subgrade reaction 0h value
which in turn is considered based on the relative density of the soil as observed in the
boreholes conducted, as per table 3 of appendix C of the BIS code IS:2911.
A.1.3 For evaluation of the modulus of horizontal subgrade reaction, the soil along the top
length of the pile has been considered on an average to be in a loose state based on the
range of N-values recorded within this length/depth.
A.1.4 The lateral pile load capacity is then determined as the horizontal force required for
causing the allowable horizontal deflection of the pile head when considering the pile as
a cantilever.
A.1.5 For calculation purposes, the concrete of pile has been considered to be of M25 grade.
A.1.6 For the determination of the lateral pile load capacity, the allowable horizontal deflection
of the pile head has been considered as 5mm based on the provisions of clause 7.4 of BIS
code IS:2911 (Part4) - 1985.
A.2 Evaluation of Depth of Fixity
A.2.1 Considering that the soil in the top of the pile is in a loose state (due to N values ranging
between 4 to 9), the modulus of horizontal subgrade reaction can be taken as 0.08kg/cm3
applicable for submerged conditions, as per table 3 of appendix C of the BIS code
IS:2911.
A.2.2 The stiffness factor is calculated using the following formula:
T = 5% (E . I /0h)
Where E is the elastic modulus and I is the moment of inertia of the pile section that has
to be determined by taking into account the flexural rigidity provided by the concrete.
A.2.3 The elastic modulus of concrete is determined as :

E  5000  f ck

Where fck = characteristic strength of concrete = 25N/mm2

G(C)9289

35

Page 35 of 136
Hence, E = 25,000 N/mm2 or 250,000kg/cm2
A.2.4 The moment of inertia of the pile section is determined as :
 d4
I
64
Hence, I = 306796.16 cm4
A.2.5 For the above value of the modulus of horizontal subgrade reaction and flexural rigidity
of the concrete, the stiffness factor (T) works out to 2.49m. As per fig.2 of the Appendix
C of IS 2911 the depth of Fixity works out to
Zf = 4.76m (for free head condition)
Zf = 5.43m (for fixed head condition).
A.3 Determination of Lateral Pile Load Capacity
A.3.1 The horizontal deflection of the pile head, is determined by the following equations :
QL  Z 3f
y (for free head condition)
3 E  I
Ql  Z 3f
y (for fixed head condition)
12  E  I
A.3.2 Considering an allowable horizontal deflection of the pile head of 5mm, the lateral pile
load capacity works out to be :
QL = 1.07tons (for free head condition)
Ql = 2.87tons (for fixed head condition)
Therefore Adopt
QL = 1.05 tons (for free head condition)
Ql = 2.85 tons (for fixed head condition)
Note : The above calculation has been carried out by neglecting the contribution of the
reinforcement to the flexural rigidity of the pile, which will increase when the
contribution of the reinforcement is considered and can be further increased by
increasing the area of reinforcement provided in the pile. An increased flexural rigidity
implies a greater lateral pile load carrying capacity for the same allowable deflection.

G(C)9289

36

Page 36 of 136
Appendix B

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF WATER

Test Results of BH IS 456-2000


Sl.
Description limits
No 1 2 3 4 5 (Maximum)
1 To neutralize 100 Should not
ml sample of water require more than
using 1.2 1.8 1.9 1.4 1.6 5ml of 0.02N
P heno lp h t h a l ein NaOH
indicator (ml)
2 To neutralise 100ml Should not
sample of water require more than
23.2 22.9 19.8 20.4 21.6
using Mixed 25ml of 0.02N
indicator (ml) H2SO4
3 a. Inorganic Solids 270 184 226 249 194 3000 mg/l
b. Organic Solids 1.2 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.1 200 mg/l
c. Chloride (as Cl) 500 mg/l for
76 88 91 68 72
RCC
d. Sulphate as (SO3) 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 400 mg/l
e. Suspended mater 162 245 167 194 201 2000 mg/l
f. pH value 7.17 7.26 7.18 7.09 7.16 Minimum 6.0

Test Results of Water


Sl. IS 456-2000 limits
Description collected from near by
No (Maximum)
water body
1 To neutralize 100 Should not require more than
ml sample of water 5ml of 0.02N NaOH
using 3.8
P heno lp h t h a lein
indicator (ml)
2 To neutralise 100ml Should not require more than
sample of water 25ml of 0.02N H2SO4
27.9
using Mixed
indicator (ml)
3 a. Inorganic Solids 1097 3000 mg/l
b. Organic Solids 9.9 200 mg/l
c. Chloride (as Cl) 194 500 mg/l for RCC
d. Sulphate as (SO3) 57 400 mg/l
e. Suspended mater 1962 2000 mg/l
f. pH value 7.87 Minimum 6.0

G(C)9289

37

Page 37 of 136
Appendix C

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF SOIL

BH pH Chlorides Sulphates Organic Inorganic


No as Cl (%) as SO4 (%) (%) (%)
1 7.22 0.046 0.008 4.8 95.2
2 7.16 0.051 0.007 5.2 94.8
3 7.9 0.072 0.009 4.1 95.9
4 7.14 0.061 0.01 3.6 96.4
5 7.21 0.058 0.011 5.7 94.3

G(C)9289

38

Page 38 of 136
Appendix D

Electrical Resistance for various spacing of electrodes


(as measured in the field)

ERT - 1

Distance North North- East South- South South- West North-


(m) East East West West

1.5 4.12 4.32 4.72 5.01 4.66 4.81 5.01 4.57

3 2.16 2.22 2.61 2.17 2.57 3.02 2.73 2.84

6 0.81 0.91 1.02 0.72 0.75 0.67 0.73 1.51

9 0.25 0.31 0.28 0.21 0.32 0.21 0.41 0.27

12 0.09 0.05 0.04 0.06 0.09 0.01 0.07 0.02

ERT - 2

Distance North North- East South- South South- West North-


(m) East East West West

1.5 5.12 5.84 6.01 5.34 5.55 5.07 4.96 5.85

3 2.65 2.71 2.81 2.45 5.56 2.76 3.24 2.83

6 1.02 1.34 1.51 0.99 1.39 1.53 1.61 1.42

9 0.57 0.71 0.77 0.53 0.66 0.59 0.51 0.62

12 0.11 0.06 0.16 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.09 0.13

ERT - 3

Distance North North- East South- South South- West North-


(m) East East West West

1.5 5.12 4.59 4.81 4.93 4.83 4.46 4.91 4.97

3 2.06 2.34 2.26 2.17 2.26 2.34 2.01 2.31

6 1.09 1.07 1.11 1 1.13 0.97 0.82 1.06

9 0.54 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.62 0.53 0.55 0.57

12 0.16 0.21 0.09 0.17 0.2 0.11 0.14 0.13

G(C)9289

39

Page 39 of 136
Appendix E

LIST OF IS CODES
Field Investigation
1. IS : 1498 - 1970 : Classification and identification of soils for general engineering
purposes (First Revision) (Amendment 2)
2. IS : 1892 - 1979 : Code of practice for sub surface investigations for foundations
(First revision)
3. IS : 2131 - 1981 : Method of Standard Penetration Tests for soils (First revision)
4. IS : 2132 - 1986 : Code of practice for thin walled tube sampling of soils (Second
revision)
Laboratory Tests
1. IS : 2720 - 1983 (Part 1) : Methods of test for soils: Preparation of dry soil samples
for various tests (Second revision)
2. IS : 2720 - 1980 (Part 2) : Method of test for soils: Determination of water content
(Second revision) Amendment 1
3. IS : 2720 - 1980 (Part 3/Sec 1) : Method of test for soils : Determination of
Specific Gravity : Fine grained soils. (First
revision)
4. IS : 2720 - 1980 (Part 3/Sec 2) : Method of test for soils : Determination of
Specific Gravity : Fine, Medium & Coarse
grained soils. (First revision).
5. IS : 2720 - 1985 (Part 4) : Method of test for soils : Grain size analysis (Second
revision)
6. IS : 2720 - 1985 (Part 5) : Method of test for soils : Determination of liquid and
plastic limit (Second revision)
7. IS : 2720 - 1977 (Part 40) : Methods of tests for soils: Determination of free swell
index of soils.
8. IS:2720(Part XVI):1979 : Methods of test for soils (Part XVI) Laboratory
determination of CBR

Foundation Construction
1. IS : 1080 - 1986 : Code of practice for design and construction of shallow
foundations on soils (other than raft, ring and shell) (Second
revision)
2. IS : 1904 - 1986 : Code of practice for design and construction of foundation in
soils: General requirements (Third revision)
3. IS 6403 - 1981 : Code of practice for determination of bearing capacity of
shallow foundations : First revision (Amendment 1)
4. IS 8009 - 1976 (Part 1) : Code of practice for calculation of settlements of
foundations : Shallow foundations subject to
symmetrical static vertical loads (Amendment 2)
5. IS 2911 (Part I to IV) : Design and construction of pile foundations.

G(C)9289

40

Page 40 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 7.5m Term. Depth : 25.5m B.H. No. : 1
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

7 1.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 32 52 59 26

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.80 11.87 CD 0.32

8 3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

4.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.82 11.53 CD 0.30

16 4.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 19 35 46 53 23

25 6.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

7.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.90 19.63 CD 0.28

31 7.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

34 9.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 21 36 43 49 21

10.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.93 22.16 CD 0.25


G(C)9289
1

Page 41 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 7.5m Term. Depth : 25.5m B.H. No. : 1A
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
41 10.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

51 12.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 22 37 41 47 20

56 13.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

>100 15.0 Hard clay 0 21 33 46 53 23


(89/25cm)
>100 16.5 Hard clay
(99/22cm)
>100 18.0 Hard clay
(111/20cm)
>100 19.5 Hard clay 0 23 35 42 49 21
(50/12cm)
>100
(50/8cm) 21.0 Hard clay
>100
(50/10cm) 22.5 Hard clay
>100
(50/7cm) 24.0 Hard clay 0 25 37 38 45 20
>100
(50/4cm) 25.5 Hard clay
G(C)9289

*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)


1A

Page 42 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 11.5m Term. Depth : 25.5m B.H. No. : 2
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

5 1.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 30 55 62 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.78 12.26 CD 0.33 13

7 3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

4.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.81 11.79 CD 0.31 14

23 4.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 20 35 45 52 22

29 6.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

7.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.89 13.23 CD 0.29 18

33 7.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

41 9.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 21 35 44 51 22

10.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.94 22.01 CD 0.23 21


G(C)9289

52 10.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

59 12.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 23 37 40 46 20


2

Page 43 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 11.5m Term. Depth : 25.5m B.H. No. : 2A
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
>100 13.5 Hard clay
(81/23cm)
>100 15.0 Hard clay 0 20 34 46 51 23
(99/20cm)
>100 16.5 Hard clay
(107/17cm)
>100 18.0 Hard clay
(50/12cm)
>100
(50/7cm) 19.5 Hard clay 0 24 32 44 51 22
>100
(50/14cm) 21.0 Hard clay
>100
(50/10cm) 22.5 Hard clay
>100
(50/6cm) 24.0 Hard clay 0 27 35 38 44 19
>100
(50/3cm)
25.5 Hard clay
*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
2A

Page 44 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 12.5m Term. Depth : 19.5m B.H. No. : 3
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

7 1.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 33 50 59 25

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.79 11.96 CD 0.31 14

9 3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

4.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.83 11.46 CD 0.30 15

24 4.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

29 6.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 20 35 45 51 23

7.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.88 15.36 CD 0.28 18

38 7.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

75 9.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 22 36 42 50 21

85 10.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay


G(C)9289

93 12.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay


3

Page 45 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 12.5m Term. Depth : 19.5m B.H. No. : 3A
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
>100 13.5 Hard clay 0 20 35 45 52 22
(95/23cm)
>100 15.0 Hard clay
(50/5cm)
>100 16.5 Hard clay 0 22 37 41 47 20
(50/3cm)
>100 18.0 Hard clay
(50/5cm)
>100
(50/2cm) 19.5 Hard clay 0 26 37 37 43 18
*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
3A

Page 46 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 11.0m Term. Depth : 19.5m B.H. No. : 4
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

5 1.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 30 54 61 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.77 12.19 CD 0.33 13

9 3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

4.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.83 11.20 CD 0.32 14

26 4.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 20 36 44 53 22

32 6.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

7.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.88 17.09 CD 0.26 20

35 7.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 22 35 43 50 21

67 9.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

79 10.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay


G(C)9289

96 12.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 25 37 38 45 19


4

Page 47 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 11.0m Term. Depth : 19.5m B.H. No. : 4A
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
>100 13.5 Hard clay
(102/19cm)
>100 15.0 Hard clay 0 22 34 44 50 22
(121/19cm)
>100 16.5 Hard clay
(50/5cm)
>100 18.0 Hard clay 0 25 36 39 46 20
(50/10cm)
>100
(50/3cm) 19.5 Hard clay
*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
4A

Page 48 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 8.0m Term. Depth : 21.0m B.H. No. : 5
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

4 1.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 29 57 66 28

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.77 11.96 CD 0.33 13

7 3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

4.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.80 12.24 CD 0.32 14

24 4.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 18 34 48 55 24

31 6.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

7.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 1.86 15.84 CD 0.28 19

36 7.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

75 9.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay

91 10.5 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 23 37 40 47 20


G(C)9289

93 12.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay


5

Page 49 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: 8.0m Term. Depth : 21.0m B.H. No. : 5A
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
>100 13.5 Hard clay 0 22 33 45 52 22
(89/25cm)
>100 15.0 Hard clay
(89/25cm)
>100 16.5 Hard clay 0 25 35 40 47 20
(89/25cm)
>100 18.0 Hard clay
(89/25cm)
>100
(89/25cm) 19.5 Hard clay 0 27 36 37 42 18
>100
(89/25cm) 21.0 Hard clay

*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)


G(C)9289
5A

Page 50 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 1
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis
Depth (m) Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 29 57 62 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 30 55 59 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 33 50 55 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
6

Page 51 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 2
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 29 56 63 28

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 32 52 60 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 33 50 56 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
7

Page 52 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 3
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 30 56 62 28

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 32 53 58 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 34 50 55 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
8

Page 53 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 4
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 30 55 63 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 31 53 59 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 33 50 56 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
9

Page 54 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 5
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 29 57 66 29

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 30 55 62 27

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 32 52 58 26


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
10

Page 55 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 6
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 32 53 59 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 31 53 59 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 33 50 56 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
11

Page 56 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 7
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 29 57 63 28

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 32 53 59 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 32 51 56 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
12

Page 57 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 8
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 29 56 63 29

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 30 54 60 27

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 31 52 57 26


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
13

Page 58 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 9
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 14 30 56 66 29

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 29 56 60 27

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 31 52 56 24


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
14

Page 59 of 136
Project: MSME buildings at SIPCOT Industrial Park, Vallam, Vadagal, Kanchipuram, Tamilnadu.
SOIL PROFILE
B. H. Location: Water Table: Not met Term. Depth : 3.0m T.P. No. : 10
N - Value# Atterberg In-situ Triaxial Test
Grain Size Analysis

Depth (m)
Soil Description

(%)
Gravel
(%)
Sand
(%)
Silt
(%)
Clay
(%)
Liquid
(%)
Plastic
(g/cm3)
Density
Cont (%)

Type

(kg/cm2)
c
(O)
N
Water
*
0.0 Ground level

1.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 15 29 56 62 27

2.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 16 32 52 58 26

3.0 Brownish grey sandy silty clay 0 17 34 49 56 25


*-Natural Bulk Density # -N Values (Observed)
G(C)9289
15

Page 60 of 136
Page 61 of 136
BH 1 BH 2 BH 3 BH 4 BH 5
E.G.L

1 -7 2 -5 3 -7 4 -5 5 -4
2 U
1
U
1
U
1
U
1
U
1
-8 -7 -9 -9 -7
1 2 3 4 5
4 U
2 -16
U
2 -23
U
2 -24
U
2 -26
U
2 -24

6 -25 -29 -29 -32 -31


1 2 3 4 5
U U U U U
3 -31 3 -33 3 -38 3 -35 3 -36
8
-34 -41 -75 -67 -75
1 2 3 4 5
10 U
4 -41
U
4 -52
U
4 -85
U
4 -79
U
4 -91
Depth (m)

12 -51 -59 -93 -96 -93

-56 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100


14 (81/23cm) (95/23cm) (102/19cm) (94/19cm)
->100 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100
(89/25cm) (99/20cm) (50/5cm) (121/19cm) (50/5cm)
16 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100
(99/22cm) (107/17cm) (50/3cm) (50/5cm) (50/3cm)

18 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100


(111/20cm) (50/12cm) (50/5cm) (50/10cm) (50/8cm)
->100 ->100 ->100 ->100 ->100
20 (50/12cm) (50/7cm) (50/2cm) (50/3cm) (50/5cm)

->100 ->100 ->100


(50/8cm) (50/14cm) (50/2cm)
22 ->100 ->100
(50/10cm) (50/10cm)

24 ->100 ->100
(50/7cm) (50/6cm)
->100 ->100
26 (50/4cm) (50/3cm)

KEY

Brownish grey 7 'N' Value(Observed) E.G.L : Existing Ground level


Sandy (14-22%)
Silty (29-37%) Water table was 2 1st Undisturbed sample in
U
Clay (41-57%) encountered 1 Borehole no 2

COMPILED SOIL PROFILE


PROJECT : TECHNOLOGY CENTER AT SIPCOT INDUSTRIAL PARK,
VALLAM VADAGAL, KANCHIPURAM, TAMIL NADU

G(C)9289

Page 62 of 136
& '
!
" # $ !% " !%

Page 63 of 136
& '
!
" # $ !% " !%

Page 64 of 136
& '
!
" # $ !% " !%

Page 65 of 136
& '
!
" # $ !% " !%

Page 66 of 136
& '
!
" # $ !% " !%

Page 67 of 136
Page 68 of 136
Page 69 of 136
!

Page 70 of 136
!

Page 71 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 2m
Cc = 0.221

G(C) 9289

Page 72 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

6a

Page 73 of 136
0.74

0.72

0.70

0.68

0.66 av = 0.048 cm 2/kg

0.64
Void Ratio 'e'

0.62

0.60

0.58

0.56

0.54

0.52

0.50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 2m

G(C) 9289

6b

Page 74 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 4m
Cc = 0.197

G(C) 9289

Page 75 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

7a

Page 76 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.053 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 4m

G(C) 9289

7b

Page 77 of 136
0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 7m
Cc = 0.099

G(C) 9289

Page 78 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.6

0.8

1.2

1.4
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

8a

Page 79 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.022 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 7m

G(C) 9289

8b

Page 80 of 136
0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 10m
Cc = 0.072

G(C) 9289

Page 81 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

9a

Page 82 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.016 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH1
Depth - 10m

G(C) 9289

9b

Page 83 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 2m
Cc = 0.227

G(C) 9289

10

Page 84 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

10a

Page 85 of 136
0.74

0.72

0.70

0.68 av = 0.049 cm 2/kg

0.66

0.64
Void Ratio 'e'

0.62

0.60

0.58

0.56

0.54

0.52

0.50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 2m

G(C) 9289

10b

Page 86 of 136
0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 4m
Cc = 0.176

G(C) 9289

11

Page 87 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

11a

Page 88 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63
av = 0.038 cm 2/kg
Void Ratio 'e'

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 4m

G(C) 9289

11b

Page 89 of 136
0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 7m
Cc = 0.103

G(C) 9289

12

Page 90 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

12a

Page 91 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.022 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 7m

G(C) 9289

12b

Page 92 of 136
0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 10m
Cc = 0.076

G(C) 9289

13

Page 93 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

13a

Page 94 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.017 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH2
Depth - 10m

G(C) 9289

13b

Page 95 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 2m
Cc = 0.224

G(C) 9289

14

Page 96 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

14a

Page 97 of 136
0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65 av = 0.049 cm 2/kg

0.63
Void Ratio 'e'

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 2m

G(C) 9289

14b

Page 98 of 136
0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 4m
Cc = 0.183

G(C) 9289

15

Page 99 of 136
0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

15a

Page 100 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.048 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 4m

G(C) 9289

15b

Page 101 of 136


0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 7m
Cc = 0.109

G(C) 9289

16

Page 102 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.6

0.8

1.2

1.4
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

16a

Page 103 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.024 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH3
Depth - 7m

G(C) 9289

16b

Page 104 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 2m
Cc = 0.226

G(C) 9289

17

Page 105 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

17a

Page 106 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
av = 0.049 cm 2/kg
0.63
Void Ratio 'e'

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 2m

G(C) 9289

17b

Page 107 of 136


0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 4m
Cc = 0.185

G(C) 9289

18

Page 108 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.6

0.8

1.2

1.4
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

18a

Page 109 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.040 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 4m

G(C) 9289

18b

Page 110 of 136


0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 7m
Cc = 0.091

G(C) 9289

19

Page 111 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.6

0.8

1.2
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

19a

Page 112 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.020 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH4
Depth - 7m

G(C) 9289

19b

Page 113 of 136


0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 2.0m
Cc = 0.234

G(C) 9289

20

Page 114 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4
Settlement (mm)

0.6

0.8

1.2

1.4
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

20a

Page 115 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.051 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 2m

G(C) 9289

20b

Page 116 of 136


0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65
Void Ratio 'e'

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 4m
Cc = 0.181

G(C) 9289

21

Page 117 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

21a

Page 118 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63 av = 0.039 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm )
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 4m

G(C) 9289

21b

Page 119 of 136


0.69

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.61
Void Ratio 'e'

0.59

0.57

0.55

0.53

0.51

0.49

0.47

0.45
0.1 1 10
Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)
Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 7m
Cc = 0.082

G(C) 9289

22

Page 120 of 136


0.1 kg/sq.cm
0.2 kg/sq.cm
0.4 kg/sq.cm
0.8 kg/sq.cm
1.6 kg/sq.cm
3.2 kg/sq.cm
6.4 kg/sq.cm

0.2

0.4

0.6
Settlement (mm)

0.8

1.2

1.4

1.6
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Square Root of Time (s)

Consolidation Test Analysis

Sample : BH5, 2m depth

G(C) 9289

22a

Page 121 of 136


0.75

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.67 av = 0.018 cm 2/kg


Void Ratio 'e'

0.65

0.63

0.61

0.59

0.57

0.55
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Applied Pressure 'p' (kg/cm 2)


Soil Sample Details
Borehole - BH5
Depth - 7m

G(C) 9289

22b

Page 122 of 136


G(C)9289

23

Page 123 of 136


G(C)9289

24

Page 124 of 136


G(C)9289

25

Page 125 of 136


G(C)9289

26

Page 126 of 136


G(C)9289

27

Page 127 of 136


G(C)9289

28

Page 128 of 136


G(C)9289

29

Page 129 of 136


G(C)9289

30

Page 130 of 136


G(C)9289

31

Page 131 of 136


G(C)9289

32

Page 132 of 136


G(C)9289

33

Page 133 of 136


G(C)9289

34

Page 134 of 136


G(C)9289

35

Page 135 of 136


G(C)9289

36

Page 136 of 136

You might also like